summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes4
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
-rw-r--r--old/66667-0.txt3548
-rw-r--r--old/66667-0.zipbin59649 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h.zipbin435542 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/66667-h.htm4757
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/cover.jpgbin67787 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i017.jpgbin50378 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i019.jpgbin48661 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i021.jpgbin51562 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i027.jpgbin53278 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i031.jpgbin42715 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i045.jpgbin22587 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/i077.jpgbin20344 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/66667-h/images/titlepage.jpgbin17218 -> 0 bytes
16 files changed, 17 insertions, 8305 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7b82bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+*.txt text eol=lf
+*.htm text eol=lf
+*.html text eol=lf
+*.md text eol=lf
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a95fafd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #66667 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/66667)
diff --git a/old/66667-0.txt b/old/66667-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c8505f9..0000000
--- a/old/66667-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3548 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Penmanship, by Leta Severance Hiles
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Penmanship
- Teaching and Supervision
-
-Author: Leta Severance Hiles
-
-Release Date: November 4, 2021 [eBook #66667]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-Produced by: Craig Kirkwood and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
- at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images
- generously made available by The Internet Archive)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PENMANSHIP ***
-
-Transcriber’s Notes:
-
-Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_).
-
-Additional Transcriber’s Notes are at the end.
-
- * * * * *
-
-PENMANSHIP
-
-_Teaching and Supervision_
-
-
-
-
-PENMANSHIP
-
-
- _Teaching and
- Supervision_
-
- BY
- LETA SEVERANCE HILES
-
- _Supervisor of Penmanship
- Long Beach, California_
-
- JESSE RAY MILLER
- 3474 UNIVERSITY AVENUE
- LOS ANGELES
-
- * * * * *
-
- COPYRIGHT 1924, BY JESSE RAY MILLER
-
- FIRST PRINTING
- APRIL, 1924
-
- _Printed in the United States of America
- Press of Jesse Ray Miller
- Los Angeles_
-
-
-
-
-CONTENTS
-
-
- CHAPTER
-
- I THE PENMANSHIP PROBLEM 9
-
- _The Commercial Factor--The Educational Factor--Educational
- Value._
-
- II FUNDAMENTALS CONCERNED IN THE PROBLEM 15
-
- _Physical Training Phase--Correct Posture--Correct
- Movement--Visualization of Letter Forms--Practice--
- Application of the Correct Habits to Daily
- Requirements._
-
- III THE GENERALLY ACCEPTED SOLUTION: MUSCULAR MOVEMENT 43
-
- _Conservation of Health a Prime Factor in the Solution--
- Economy of Time a Result of the Solution._
-
- IV PREPARATION OF THE TEACHER 51
-
- _The Technique of the Subject--The Ability to Secure
- Results--The Penmanship Perspective._
-
- V SUITABLE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 61
-
- _Text--Blackboard and the Use of It--Paper--Folders--
- Pencil--Pen--Penholder--Blotter--Ink--Economy in the Use
- of Material._
-
- VI SOME WORKABLE SUGGESTIONS 72
-
- _How to Study--How to Move and Slant the Paper--
- Blackboard Work of the Pupils--Name Cards--Figures--
- Alphabet--Endurance Tests--Objectives in Good Writing
- Habits--Progress Lesson--Segregation--Line Quality--
- Samples--Preparation for the regular Visit of the
- Supervisor--Counting--Use of the Timepiece--Awards--Use
- of Standard Penmanship Tests._
-
- VII SUGGESTIONS FOR THE GRADES, JUNIOR AND SENIOR HIGH SCHOOLS 85
-
- _A General Not a Specific Plan--First Grade--Second
- Grade--Third Grade--Fourth Grade--Fifth Grade--Sixth
- Grade--Seventh Grade--Eighth Grade--Junior High
- School--Senior High School._
-
- VIII SUPERVISION AND THE PENMANSHIP SUPERVISOR 113
-
- _Supervision in the Past--Function of the Supervisor--
- Leadership a Prime Qualification--Personality a
- Necessary Qualification--Broad Preparation Indispensable
- to the Supervisor--Continual Preparation Essential--
- Rating--The Best Qualified Supervisor._
-
- BIBLIOGRAPHY 123
-
- INDEX 126
-
-
-
-
-INTRODUCTION
-
-
-Reading, writing, and arithmetic have for long been looked upon as the
-fundamentals in education. And in very truth they are. Altogether too
-little attention has been given the expression of thought involved
-in the study of any school subject whether such expression takes the
-form of oral or written language. In fact, many failures in school
-and misunderstandings in actual life are due to inability to properly
-interpret text, read intelligently, or speak correctly.
-
-No small part of this entire problem, especially when applied to grade
-pupils, is the mechanical or penmanship side. Everywhere there is
-criticism, on the part of teachers and parents, of the quality of the
-pupils’ writing. In many instances the process is a slow and laborious
-one. The bodily positions assumed by pupils during the operation of
-writing are harmful. The effort frequently results in an illegible
-scrawl. Too often, little or no attention is given penmanship in the
-grades and consequently boys and girls go through life laboring under a
-serious handicap.
-
-In the following pages an attempt is made to bring definitely and
-concisely before educators the fundamental facts necessary to secure
-legibility and rapidity in penmanship, without causing strain of eye or
-cramp of hand. The treatment of the subject is simple and direct. The
-discussion of the problem of penmanship is followed by a consideration
-of the essentials necessary to the establishment of a habit that shall
-result in good penmanship. The materials necessary are taken up in
-detail. The teacher’s preparation is dwelt upon. Workable suggestions
-are given a place. One chapter deals with the minimum requirements for
-all and the closing chapter discusses supervision.
-
-The entire work is based upon an extended experience with pupils
-and teachers. Every suggestion and direction has been worked out in
-actual practice. The volume has been prepared in response to continued
-requests from teachers, principals, and superintendents who desire
-explicit directions that can be used to supplement any system of
-muscular movement penmanship.
-
-The author wishes to express her gratitude to the hundreds of teachers,
-scattered throughout several states in the Union, to whom she has had
-the privilege of offering instruction and from whom helpful suggestions
-have come.
-
- L. S. H.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER ONE THE PENMANSHIP PROBLEM
-
-
-THE COMMERCIAL FACTOR
-
-We are living in a practical age. Every institution of worth points to
-the truth of this statement. Of every plan advanced the query comes,
-“Will it stand a practical test?” We are constantly experimenting with,
-and adopting, new methods, and those in force today may be displaced
-tomorrow as being behind the spirit of the time. It is only natural
-that the commercialization of penmanship should take place.
-
-When a business man is asked what qualification counts most in
-employing clerks he is very apt to say, “Other things being equal,
-the good writer gets the place.” Henry Clews, the Wall Street banker,
-frankly states that the beginning of his successful career may be
-traced to good penmanship.
-
-A letter of application for a position is not judged by school room
-standards, but by business standards. These two sets of standards
-should be in harmony. An educator of authority finds that “there is
-little contention as to the function the child is to serve when he
-becomes part of the world in which he shall eventually find himself.
-Our methods as practiced however, would hardly be recognized as having
-any foundation in the thought for future citizenship.” Think of the
-vast army of boys and girls who leave the elementary school at an early
-age to earn a livelihood. These should be given the best practical
-equipment.
-
-To be sure, there are those who cite instances of great men whose
-handwriting is almost unreadable, and argue that point in favor of
-allowing all public school pupils to be poor writers. Common sense
-teaches us that it is unwise to burden ourselves with an unnecessary
-handicap.
-
-Others will say that it is not worth while, as every one will use
-a typewriter upon entering the commercial world. Only a certain
-proportion will enter the world of commerce, and a majority of those
-who do enter tell us that they have as much work to do with pen or
-pencil as on the typewriter.
-
-The initial drafts of the majority of all important documents are
-usually written with the pen. We have the word of many an author
-that an attempt to dictate the first draft results disastrously to
-the content of the manuscript. We therefore infer that in matters of
-importance the use of the mechanical device is not conducive to the
-best composition. The typewriter is of great convenience after the
-first draft has been revised.
-
-
-THE EDUCATIONAL FACTOR
-
-Again, would it not be vastly worth while, even for school purposes
-alone, to learn rapid, easy and legible hand-writing, since a majority
-of pupils spend nine years in the elementary and junior high schools? A
-good percentage finish high school and many pursue a college career for
-four years. What an asset good easy writing is in school and college!
-Every pupil owes it as a duty to himself and to his instructors to
-express himself legibly on paper.
-
-Finally, while its worth cannot be fully estimated, good writing is
-eagerly sought and its possessor finds it ever a ready servant and
-valued friend. We should strive for usable knowledge. In McMurray’s
-_How To Study_ we learn that “It is a part of one’s work as a student,
-therefore, to plan to turn one’s knowledge to some account; to plan
-not alone to sell it for money, but to use it in various ways in daily
-life.”
-
-
-EDUCATIONAL VALUE
-
-Perhaps the most widely recognized educational value of good penmanship
-would come under the head of utility. Pleasing angles, graceful curves,
-uniformity, and clear strong lines appeal alike to all. From the
-attitude taken by many educational folk, relegating this subject in the
-curriculum to the background, we might think that they prefer illegible
-writing. Yet frequently these are the very persons who are heard to
-complain the loudest and longest over poorly written test papers and
-unreadable letters from friends.
-
-Muscular movement penmanship may be utilized to advantage in school and
-out. In the first place it saves the pupils’ time and physical energy
-in execution and the teachers’ time and energy in interpreting. In the
-second place it is most emphatically demanded by the world that many
-of these pupils will enter upon leaving school. Parents draw their
-conclusions, many times, regarding the quality of work in the school
-largely from the appearance of written work.
-
-Pupils who have persistently followed the drill until it has influenced
-their actual writing will soon realize their power: here is the
-evidence on paper, the measure of the effort put forth. They have
-conquered both mentally and physically. Will not the confidence
-established in their own ability be of value to them in mastering other
-subjects? What gives more pleasure, self-respect and encouragement to
-persevere than the conscious knowledge of skill? This consciousness of
-power and skill is a tremendous educational force and one that should
-receive constant recognition with reference to penmanship.
-
-Many are the pupils who have great difficulty in gaining book lore, but
-who find the manual arts attractive. To such the consciousness that
-they can do even one thing well is a powerful inducement toward the
-mastery of something less attractive.
-
-Pupils learn before they finish the elementary school that proper
-conventions must be observed in order to preserve social order and
-relations. When these conventions are overlooked to a great extent in
-writing, pupils are not gaining the most that the subject has to teach
-them. When irregularities become noticeable a check should be placed;
-otherwise the habit will become strong enough to be of great hindrance
-in later life. In no subject can a tendency to tear down conventions
-be discovered more easily than in penmanship and nowhere can we better
-impress upon pupils the desirability of obeying, to a reasonable
-degree, the conventional lines which all social beings are bound to
-recognize.
-
-Who cannot recall at least one “bad boy” who has been completely
-reformed by some one of the manual arts? Muscular movement penmanship
-has many such to its credit. Teachers and supervisors are called upon
-quite as much to reform as to form and inform.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER TWO FUNDAMENTALS CONCERNED IN THE PROBLEM
-
-
-THE PHYSICAL TRAINING PHASE
-
-Pupils who are apt at athletics will easily recognize the purpose of
-muscular movement penmanship. They will draw upon former experiences
-in the field or gymnasium and compare the value of relaxation, good
-posture, rhythm, and continuity of movement. They will recognize that
-the same laws of control govern Indian club swinging, field sports, and
-penmanship. They will appreciate the fact that to obtain good results
-with the pen they must follow with military precision the directions
-of the leader. Interest will be doubled when pupils really find
-themselves. Many pupils obey the laws of correlation naturally, and
-through their athletics they gain control of the muscular adjustment
-that operates in the process of writing.
-
-Adult learners of muscular movement frequently have more difficulty
-in relaxing completely than do younger pupils. Often with adults the
-habit of bodily relaxation has not been developed along with other
-habits, and therefore muscular tension prevails. A leading criticism on
-Americans is that we never relax.
-
-James says: “It is your relaxed and easy worker who is in no hurry
-and quite thoughtless most of the while of consequences who is your
-efficient worker; and tension and anxiety, present and future, all
-mixed up together in our mind at once, are the surest drags upon steady
-progress.”
-
-[Illustration: AT ATTENTION]
-
-[Illustration: RELAXATION]
-
-[Illustration: READY TO ASSUME CORRECT POSITION OF ARMS, HANDS, PEN AND
-PAPER]
-
-The mind must be concentrated upon the relaxation of the muscles in
-order to get the best results. As writing is feeling passed through
-thought and fixed in form, it is very important in writing that the
-mind help make the muscles to make movements, just as it helps them to
-relax. By putting the muscles in a workable condition at the beginning
-of each lesson, great improvement in muscular response will be
-observed. Muscular relaxation must be considered seriously if we would
-make real progress in muscular training. We all know how cramped and
-tremulous the letters are when they are written by a hand that is under
-nervous tension. The nerves must be at ease, the pen must rest lightly
-in the hand in order to obtain the best results. Teachers who
-have not the ability to relax themselves, cannot hope to lead the class
-to do so. The tone of voice used in giving directions, whether musical
-or strident, has to do with inducing relaxation. The following plan has
-proven of value in the class room:
-
-1. Pupils sit erect in seats, stretch arms out even with the shoulders,
-feet on the floor, heads erect, while the teacher counts softly to ten,
-with the pupils; at ten, drop the arms to the sides. Repeat six times.
-A practiced eye will soon see whose arms are tense. Ask pupils to
-become as limber as they would in skating, jumping, dancing, horseback
-riding or swimming.
-
-2. Pupils sit erect in seats, bend forward from the hips, raise arms
-over the desk, and six inches from the desk, make a square turn at the
-elbow, count ten slowly, drop the arms on the desk; repeat six times.
-
-3. Pupils sit erect, bend from the hips, both elbows on the lower
-corners of the desk, relax, dropping the forearm on the desk; repeat
-six times.
-
-4. Retaining position in paragraph 3 let pupils roll the muscle below
-the elbow in a circular manner to a soft musical count, from one to
-ten. Eyes should be first directed toward the arm, then away from it,
-toward the ceiling. By following the last suggestion, it is observed
-that pupils relax unconsciously. All of this drill will be of no value
-unless pupils are able to retain a relaxed condition of the muscles
-while the writing instrument is in use. Let them take the handle end of
-the pen, and prepare for this circular motion before making it.
-
-5. It will be necessary for the teacher to spend a few minutes at the
-beginning of every lesson with one or more relaxing exercises during
-the first months of each school year, and later if found necessary. It
-is advisable to break the lesson with relaxation exercises if it is
-observed that pupils are becoming keyed-up through effort.
-
-6. Rhythm and regularity of movement are essential. Pupils’ counting
-aloud relieves the tension. It may be necessary to lay the pens down
-once or twice, for a few seconds each time, during the lesson. Ability
-to control the writing arm comes in proportion to our ability to relax
-the controlling muscles. Control in the matter of penmanship is a vital
-educational factor. Says a well known authority: “Could the school
-teach effectively the lesson of self control, we need have little
-fear of the results when the product of the system is thrown upon the
-currents of the world. What is the most important attribute of man as
-a moral being? May we not answer, the faculty of self control? This
-it is which forms a chief distinction between the human being and the
-brute.”
-
-
-CORRECT POSTURE
-
-Correct posture while writing is an essential; first, from the
-standpoint of health, and again, that we may have free play of the
-writing muscles. Proper seating has an important place here. The desk
-should be sufficiently high from the seat, so that, when a pupil is
-seated and with both arms on the desk, the shoulders should not be
-raised. If the desk is too low, pupils will bend in the shoulders
-instead of from the hips and the chest will be compressed and the spine
-contorted.
-
-No doubt many cases of spinal trouble are a direct result of improper
-seating and unhealthful posture during school hours. Pupils frequently
-bend the neck and strain the nerves and muscles uselessly. The hint,
-“Heads up” is often a sufficient reminder and will serve to correct
-this ungraceful and harmful habit. By sitting almost square in front
-of the desk, circulation is not impeded in any way and relaxation will
-result more easily. The body supports itself, and must not touch the
-desk. The eyes should be fourteen inches from the paper. In order to be
-comfortable, the feet must touch the floor. It is within the province
-of the manual training department to provide wooden footstools of
-simple construction for the small pupils who must sit at large desks.
-
-With the feet on the floor, body erect, ready to bend from the hips,
-chest high, arms hanging at the sides in a relaxed manner, we are
-ready for the next step. By placing the elbows at, or near the lower
-corner of the desk, raising forearms, then relaxing and dropping to
-the desk, the pupils are impressed with the idea that they must keep
-the cushionlike muscle on the desk. The elbows may extend beyond the
-edge of the desk, perhaps an inch, if this adds to the comfort of the
-writer. There should be a right angle turn at the elbow.
-
-Drill on correct posture should be given frequently until acquired,
-several times during a lesson, in fact, while learning. Too many
-liberties with these rules will cause trouble later when the next step
-is to be accomplished.
-
-[Illustration: READY FOR WORK]
-
-With the forearms on the desk, close the right hand; open and close
-several times; with the right hand half open, the tips and nails of
-the third and little fingers touch the desk. The knuckles of the
-thumb and three fingers should be in sight. Every joint is bent a
-trifle in correct position of the hand. The two points of contact then
-are a large portion of the under forearm and the tops and nails of
-the third and little fingers. The wrist should be kept straight and
-free from the paper. The side of the hand must not touch the paper.
-Slip a card under the side of the hand to test this point. The muscles
-that hold the third and little finger in correct positions need to be
-strengthened. Pupils are apt to straighten the fingers and bring about
-a tension or go to the other extreme and curl the third and little
-fingers into the palm of the hand and glide on the knuckle joints. Both
-positions strain the ligaments and bear away from, instead of toward,
-good control. It is most important that a beginner should watch the
-position of the hand. Other mistakes may be rectified gradually, but
-correct position of the hand must be established at once.
-
-The penholder is held by the thumb and first and second finger,
-touching the second finger near the root of the nail. The first finger
-joints are bent slightly. The first finger rests on the penholder at
-least an inch from the point of the pen. The thumb joint is also bent.
-The penholder may cross above or below the knuckle joint of the first
-finger. The penholder should point half way between the shoulder and
-the elbow. Keep the penpoint on the paper squarely, wearing both nibs
-equally.
-
-[Illustration: READY FOR ACTION
-
-READY FOR PENHOLDING]
-
-In _Comprehensive Physical Culture_, we find this valuable suggestion:
-“In sitting it is necessary to hold the chest up; to guard against
-bending forward at the waist line, for this contracts the chest, cramps
-the lungs and stomach, and often produces dyspepsia. In sitting, if
-one wishes to bend, the movement should be from the hips, but never
-from the waist; the knees should never be crossed, for this position,
-besides being inelegant and ungraceful, often leads to paralysis by
-diverting the blood from the leg through pressure. The one rule to be
-observed by the woman who seeks to be healthy and graceful is to keep
-the chest active; it should never be relaxed; holding this part of the
-body constantly erect gives real poise to the carriage and strength
-to the muscles. A fine bearing is of great advantage, for it has a
-significance which people intuitively recognize and respect; the person
-who comes before us chest raised and head erect inspires confidence.
-Other things being equal, the person who elevates the chest constantly
-is more self-respecting than the one who habitually depresses it.”
-
-
-CORRECT MOVEMENT
-
-Pupils must be taught that a line is the product of the motion used;
-“that the motion preceding the contact of the pen to the paper must be
-in the direction of the line to be made, and that some letters being
-more complex than others, less speed should be used.” For example, the
-straight stroke exercise is essential as a beginning step in movement
-application because it not only stretches the muscles, but correctly
-done it teaches direction. Movement that prepares for the straight
-stroke exercise is best obtained by taking correct position and pushing
-the first finger to and from the center of the chest with the third and
-fourth finger nails gliding on the desk and forming a movable rest.
-The wrist must be kept free at this time, and the forearm moves on the
-cushionlike muscle below the elbow. We base the direction or slant of
-down strokes in letters later upon this straight stroke exercise. If
-the ovals, the next exercise in order, take an incorrect slant at any
-time, return to the practice of the straight strokes as a corrective
-means toward the proper slant.
-
-Pupils must know that the direction of movement is one of the chief
-essentials, and that before they can possess ability to produce
-properly proportioned forms they must develop their movement in the
-proper direction. They must be led to understand that the mere free and
-easy action of the arm in any direction is not necessarily a movement
-that can be used in writing.
-
-To insure against too slow a movement it will be necessary to use some
-measure for time. Counting is a good means of regulating the movement;
-it keeps the class working enthusiastically together, and gives an
-idea of how fast to practice. One count should be given for each down
-stroke. The count, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
-7, 8, 9, 20; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 30, etc., to one hundred is
-advised for straight strokes and ovals. All pupils counting in concert
-with the teacher at the rate of about two hundred down strokes per
-minute is effective, as the oral count relieves the muscular tension
-that is apt to prevail at this time. Insist that every arm move from
-the shoulder and that each pupil feel correct movement and observe his
-own arm. It is advisable to use the watch, and time pupils daily on a
-part of all drill work. If the count be too rapid, nervous spasmodic
-movements will result; if too slow, the fingers or wrist joint will be
-apt to act, and finger movement will be the result. A steady rhythmic
-beat is essential, to tone down the speed of the nervous and erratic
-and inspire the slow ones into more rapid response.
-
-There is a subtle influence in the sprightly musical count as well as
-in the conversational count, such as “round, round, round,” or “light,
-light, light,” to induce proper width to a narrow oval, or lightness to
-a heavy line. A mistake that is fatal to early progress is frequently
-made by allowing pupils to take the pen in hand to write before
-automatic movement is gained. Much drill on relaxation and study of
-the writing machine and attention to rhythm work at the correct speed
-is necessary at the beginning of each lesson, to make for automatism.
-Sufficient speed to discourage finger and induce muscular movement must
-be insisted upon at all times.
-
-At this point it will be observed that pupils vary in regard to
-their ability in the use of free movement. The group plan meets this
-difficulty very successfully. Some allowance must be made for new
-pupils, those habitually irregular, and for the slow pupils in rooms
-where children have not been segregated for ability.
-
-When all is done that can be done by the class plan to make pupils
-understand relaxation, posture, and motive power, we find that there
-will still be some who have not made sufficient progress to advance.
-The important question is, when are these pupils going to have an
-opportunity to learn? How can encouragement be offered to those who
-have done well, and at the same time continue repetition of what is
-necessary with those who have accomplished but little?
-
-The group plan is advised by many successful teachers. Assign pupils
-who have done well and who can practice in the right way to seats at
-the left of the room (“A” group) as the teacher faces the class, it
-being understood that those who prove themselves unworthy of being in
-the “A” group will have a place in the “B” group. After the segregation
-is complete and the plan under way it will be well to keep a check on
-the “A” group; some pupils forget quickly when left to themselves,
-while it develops independence and pride in others. The “B” group will
-occupy the rows to the right of the teacher as she faces the pupils,
-and by stepping to the extreme right side for the survey every hand may
-be seen while at work. The members of the “B” group understand that
-they are there because they need special help, and will be promoted
-as soon as they learn the lessons already mastered by the “A” group.
-At the beginning of every lesson a careful but brief review will be
-necessary of the points that the “B” group is expected to learn. The
-entire class should give attention at this time.
-
-The “B” group is still preparing with the handle end of the pen while
-the “A” group will be actually making lines. Economy of time should
-be studied, or the period will be wasted; both groups must be kept
-busy all the time. The same count will answer for both divisions.
-Occasionally it will be well to give the “A” group a certain amount
-of work to accomplish and to note if it is done within the right time
-limit. They are to compare carefully with their models and also to work
-for improvement in the product without special instruction. The “B”
-group will not make so many exercises but their posture and movement
-will be growing stronger every lesson. In order that they may not
-become discouraged, it is well to let them make some of the exercises
-each day but the greater part of the time should be given over to rapid
-changes of relaxation, posture and movement until these essentials are
-thoroughly ingrained. The “B” group will be greatly helped by working
-at the board, to the same count that the “A” group uses at the seats.
-Once during the lesson allow the “B” group to rest and watch the “A”
-group work. The pupils in the “B” group will not cover as much subject
-matter as will the “A” since it is composed of the new pupils and those
-who have the greatest difficulties. No pupil should be promoted to the
-“A” group until he assumes correct posture in all written work and can
-make ovals, straight strokes and short words with correct movement. He
-must prove his ability as an independent worker and show reasonably
-good results in order to be considered an “A” pupil.
-
-
-VISUALIZATION OF LETTER FORMS
-
-It has been said, “The three arts of education are seeing, reading,
-thinking. The boy who learns to see is awakened; the boy who learns to
-read is enriched; the boy who learns to think is emancipated.” Why does
-not an artist always make a desirable and pleasing picture? Perhaps it
-is because he does not see the subject correctly or to advantage, or
-perhaps he has not mastered all the mechanical difficulties. It is for
-the teacher to decide whether all has been done that can be done to
-assist the pupils to see the model letter form correctly. Perhaps there
-exist mechanical difficulties in posture and movement that prevent a
-free execution of the letter form that may exist in the mind.
-
-Pupils should understand that they are to educate the head and hand
-together. Concentration on correct forms goes hand in hand with
-practice. Some pupils have greater aptitude than others toward
-perception of form; it is certain that the hand will not learn to
-reproduce constantly a form that has not been fully and entirely
-idealized by the mind. It has been discovered that human beings
-vary greatly in the completeness, definiteness, and extent of their
-visual images. Pupils should be impressed through as many sense
-channels as possible. Some learn through explanations, others through
-demonstrations at the board, still others by working at the board
-themselves. Out of this variety of impressions each pupil will find the
-one that is most lasting for himself. Every penmanship teacher should
-recognize this principle of multiple impression.
-
-Mental pictures are what we mean when we speak of “noticing” things.
-We think we are noticing all sorts of things during our waking hours;
-as a matter of fact, we recognize fewer things than we suppose. Ask a
-pupil to describe any familiar object and prove this statement. If you
-point out the various characteristics he will quickly see them, and
-will be likely in future trials to see them; but if left to himself
-he would need a great deal of time to become familiar with the main
-features. Frequent review of model letter forms is necessary, for it
-keeps our minds fresh and helps to reveal new and hitherto unthought-of
-aspects. Each view well considered, then put aside, freshens us for
-the next one. We are thus led to make trials and discover relations
-which otherwise would remain hidden. Many pupils, for the most part
-unsuccessful, never get so far as that. Many who fail believe that they
-have seen all there is to see, take up something else, or do nothing.
-
-Pupils may be led to observe the forms of letters and their common
-characteristics through variations of common principles. To illustrate:
-many letters are modifications of the oval exercise, near or remote. In
-almost every writing system on the market we have four, the O, A, C,
-and E. Modifications of the straight stroke are more numerous still;
-then we have letters that show a combination and modification of the
-two exercises. Pupils should be able to see and describe just which
-stroke gives slant and character to the letter. There is a striking
-analogy in the beginning, ending, and width of many of our letters.
-
-Very rarely is the image the exact reproduction of the percept; it
-differs in distinctness, outline, detail, and sometimes even in most
-important qualities. Look at the model letter, close the eyes, you will
-still see the form. Retentive and reproductive powers are at work,
-while the image is in process of formation. Form perception, and other
-mental pictures than what we are striving for, are present and act upon
-and modify present percepts.
-
-Let the room be quiet, so quiet that there is nothing to distract.
-Require the pupils to lay their heads on the desks, shut their eyes,
-and rest, not for long, for fear of day dreams. Without allowing them
-to awake from their playsleep, picture in brief vivid statements,
-without repetition, or unnecessary detail, the parts of a letter. Raise
-the heads, open the eyes, take pens and ask pupils to reproduce a
-picture of the letter just described.
-
-In effective visualization certain conditions must be fulfilled. In the
-first place the exposure must have lasted for a sufficient length of
-time, very much as is required in photography. We can gain no mental
-picture of things where the exposure is too brief.
-
-A careful study of letter forms must engender the habit of observation
-and knowledge of the difference between accuracy and vagueness. Since
-penmanship is one of the manual arts it will be executed definitely
-right or definitely wrong. Chamberlain on the value of manual training
-says: “The more accurate the work in hand, the less likely is doubt
-and uncertainty to play a part. In grammar and history a mistake upon
-the pupil’s part may easily pass unchallenged. The student glides over
-an error unconsciously or without intent; and even the teacher may not
-detect the fault. In a word both the teacher and pupil are likely to
-be deceived. In the shop or in the cooking room it is quite different.
-Be the box too short, the metal too thick or too thin, the joint too
-loose, the basket askew, the stitches uneven, or the ingredients
-improper in proportion, little doubt need enter the pupil’s mind as to
-the rightness of his work.”
-
-
-PRACTICE
-
-A few years ago Dr. Gulick laid down the following hints on training
-for the boys in their athletic work in New York City:
-
-1. Always warm up slowly and cool off gradually when finished.
-
-2. Stop practice when you are exhausted.
-
-3. Dress lightly for practice or competition.
-
-4. Practice regularly, a little each day if possible.
-
-5. Have regular hours for eating and sleeping.
-
-6. Don’t smoke.
-
-To a person who has the correct perspective on the penmanship habit
-the application of the hints enumerated will seem quite reasonable.
-To train in any line, one must practice. Repetition is necessary, and
-the time element essential, as it takes many efforts to accomplish the
-desired end, good penmanship. The muscles to be trained are large, and
-the conventional forms are small.
-
-With a little forethought and planning the practice period may be
-varied, live and interesting. Everyone must learn, sooner or later,
-that much discipline may be gained by keeping steadily at work not
-interesting in itself. James says: “We have of late been learning
-much of the philosophy of tenderness in education; ‘interest’ must be
-assiduously awakened in everything, difficulties must be smoothed away.
-Soft pedagogics have taken the place of the old steep and rocky paths
-to learning. But from this lukewarm air the bracing oxygen of effort is
-left out. It is nonsense to suppose that every step in education can be
-interesting.”
-
-Thoughtless practice might much better be left undone. There is no
-use in trying to excuse careless work to oneself with the thought,
-“I won’t count this time.” Each careless stroke is being registered
-though we do not count it; for nothing we ever do, strictly speaking,
-is ever wholly blotted out. Paths frequently and recently trodden are
-those that lie most open, and those which may be expected most easily
-to lead to results.
-
-The first practice may be difficult, for the nervous and muscular
-systems have a new lesson to learn. The second and third trials will be
-easier, for the body has begun to recognize what lies before it. The
-following attempts will steadily become easier. A path means economy in
-traveling. The muscle should work with a fatalistic steadiness; if so,
-the result must necessarily be work done in a clean and finished manner.
-
-[Illustration: READY FOR DRILL]
-
-To be concrete, let us presuppose a thirty minute practice period in
-muscular movement penmanship, under fairly favorable conditions. The
-desk should be adjusted for physical comfort. The light should come
-from the left side. Loose sheets of good quality paper eight by ten
-and one-half inches in size, with three-eighths inch spacing should be
-furnished. At least two sheets should be placed under the one being
-used, that the penpoint may be saved extra wear. A fluid ink that
-flows freely is best. A coarse, flexible pen, blotter, and ink-wiper
-complete the list of supplies. It is assumed that the adopted manual
-containing instructions and model letter forms is always on the desk
-for reference during the practice period.
-
-Our first aim should be to get the mind and muscle into action. To this
-end at least two hundred two-space straight strokes or the same number
-of ovals should be made in one minute. Secondly, this will assist in
-the form building of the letter to be mastered, which let us assume is
-the capital O. A light smooth line will be obtained by limiting the
-amount of ink. Make at least two hundred strokes with one dip of ink.
-Correct speed will be best obtained by requiring the time limit in all
-drill work. Correct slant should develop as a result of the correct
-teaching of the straight stroke exercise.
-
-Having done this preliminary drill we are now ready to consider the
-second point of the lesson, namely, the making of the letter O. The
-first consideration is the general form. By comparison with the model
-we find a striking analogy in width and slant, to the form of the oval.
-The ending stroke and the points that characterize the letter must be
-observed, and lastly, the size is to be noted. Close the eyes a moment
-and see if the image is fixed. Prepare to write by using the handle
-end of the penholder until the right rhythm has been established by
-counting one, two, for the first O; three, four, for the second O;
-five, six, for the third O; seven, eight, for the fourth O; nine,
-ten, for the fifth letter of the group. Five “make believe” letters
-is the result of this count; we can easily make three groups of five
-each, across the page. Time consumed will be one minute for sixty to
-seventy-five letters. When the muscular adjustment is perfected through
-this preparatory motion, then, and then, only, are the pupils ready to
-write. Write and compare with the model, time and again. If the letter
-has been visualized correctly, each child will be able to criticize
-his own work effectively. Glaring errors should be pointed out first
-and remedied. Work on this letter might occupy the main portion of the
-writing lesson for many days before passing to another letter form.
-
-Any class that has been drilled correctly on the ovals, straight
-strokes and capital O should be able to apply the movement acquired
-to a short word and this perhaps forms the most important part of
-the lesson. For example take “Omen,” spelling the letters aloud,
-capital O-m-e-n. Words so dictated should be executed by junior high
-school pupils and adults at the rate of at least fifteen to eighteen
-per minute. This will prevent any possibility of a return to finger
-movement at this time. Dictation of letters is quite effective with
-slow pupils. The application of movement to a word, at the close of
-each lesson, will lead the pupils quite unconsciously into a better
-movement of all written work. Here they get the help along the lines
-necessary to steady and modify the movement, and a chance to get into
-the swing of actual writing without too much thought as regards the
-content. Such drill serves the same purpose in penmanship that scale
-practice does in music. The writing of words at the close of each
-lesson serves as the connecting link between the theoretical drill work
-and practical writing. Such daily drill work as just suggested at the
-close of the writing lesson will effectually eliminate the sharp line
-of demarcation between the drills and “real writing.” In a short time a
-list of words will be the result, and these with others may be combined
-into sentences. The supplementary words given should incorporate
-all the small letters of the alphabet; the one-space letters first,
-thirteen in all, then the loops above the line, _b_, _f_, _h_, _k_, and
-_l_; loops below the line, _g_, _j_, _y_, and _z_; and lastly, those
-irregular in height, _p_, _t_, _q_, and _d_. A fair allotment of time
-for the above suggestive plan would be five to ten minutes on ovals
-and strokes; ten to fifteen minutes on the letter O; and five to ten
-minutes on the word-practice.
-
-The group plan seems to be the only logical method of reaching all
-pupils with the instruction necessary to their peculiar needs. The
-advanced group will be learning to act independently, while the other
-will be learning basic principles. Friendly criticism and rivalry
-should be fostered, by comparing the method by which results were
-obtained. Let one group watch the other work. Let the group watching
-count for the other and change about. Generally, the entire class work,
-if any, should be posted, unless it be known that a certain page is
-posted because of its special merit. Pupils should be taught at the
-outset that team work in a drill subject is what counts and should
-take proper pride in good work as a class. Every class will produce a
-few good writers. In many schools a new lesson is not taken up before
-seventy-five per cent of the pupils have accomplished the preceding
-lesson well according to standards previously agreed upon. It is
-often impossible for all members of a class to attain perfection in
-penmanship. We do not demand that in other subjects.
-
-
-APPLICATION OF THE CORRECT HABITS TO DAILY REQUIREMENTS
-
-The muscular movement writing habit should become automatic when pupils
-have developed enough skill through exercises to apply the movement
-consistently to all written work. The best skilled teachers might give
-a lesson daily in any grade, but unless the principles inculcated
-during that lesson are followed conscientiously during the remaining
-periods of the day the gain will be slight. If time is allotted for
-practice the result is surely worth applying to all written exercises.
-The Committee of Fifteen appointed to investigate the coordination of
-studies in primary and grammar grades propounded the question, “Has
-penmanship distinct pedagogical value?” The following is one of the
-best answers: “Penmanship as an art is but pen drawing, as a factor in
-education it should be taught more frequently in connection with other
-studies. Both penmanship and drawing suffer much from their isolated
-position in the school course. We therefore need to teach writing while
-teaching other subjects and the reverse.”
-
-In grounding the movement application habit we may well follow these
-maxims:
-
-First, focalize the attention of the pupils on the habit to be
-acquired. Teach definitely relaxation, posture, movement, and
-visualization.
-
-Maxim number two tells us to suffer no exception to occur until the new
-habit is firmly rooted in our lives.
-
-Number three calls for frequent repetition. We must therefore give
-daily drill on the points that go to make up the correct writing habit.
-
-Fourthly, “Don’t preach too much.” Lie in wait for the practical
-opportunities, and get the pupils at once both to think and to act.
-Such opportunities are never lacking, since so many lessons are
-conducted through the medium of the pen.
-
-Lastly, keep the faculty of personal effort alive by a little
-gratuitous exercise every day. After a high degree of perfection has
-been reached it is maintained only by the follow-up system of daily
-effort directed toward the retention of the habit.
-
-The habit of movement application demands vigorous and continued
-effort; the exertion may possibly be so great that the pupil is
-temporarily more discommoded than by his former habit. If the wise
-course is pursued the old disability will vanish, a new path will be
-made in the brain, and application of movement will be established.
-
-The main problem with every teacher is how to assist pupils in linking
-up the principles that have been mastered, namely, correct posture, and
-movement applied to drills and short words with the practical writing.
-The drill on short words will prove as valuable as any other part of
-this theory work. By the laws of association, pupils will connect the
-muscular sensation of the short, rapidly written word, with what is
-required when a variety of longer words or sentences is dictated.
-
-At the beginning of every lesson in which writing is used as a vehicle
-for thought, attention to the correct habit will be the means of
-setting many pupils right, and of increasing from week to week the
-number of those who do all writing with muscular movement. Finally,
-all incorrect movement will be eliminated, and we may then return
-to visualization. A proper balance must be preserved in regard to
-seeing and doing, or our results will be one sided. When a pupil
-“finds” himself with reference to the application of movement problem,
-attention may be almost equally divided between retention of that
-movement and form building. By the time form is established movement
-will be second nature, and with a little continuous practice will never
-be lost.
-
-It is time to require all written work to be done with muscular
-movement when pupils can make good two-space ovals, four hundred across
-an eight inch page, and straight strokes in the same manner; have
-visualized one capital letter and can make it at the right speed per
-minute, for example, sixty to eighty O’s per minute; and can write
-short words such as “men” and “mine” with correct movement, in correct
-posture, and within the correct space limit. An easy way to begin is to
-require application to the subjects where the mind is least concerned
-as to the content, for example, the spelling lesson.
-
-If pupils have been taught to turn the searchlight of investigation
-on their own habits they will be entirely conscious of the feeling of
-mastery that takes possession when muscular movement becomes automatic.
-
-Those who have not thus succeeded should look well into the basic
-principles of relaxation, correct posture, and movement, especially
-as applied to letters and short words. Study the hand and arm in its
-preparatory motion while working at the correct speed. Care should be
-exercised that there be no movements of the joints of the wrist, thumb
-or fingers. Alternate the preparatory motion with writing until the
-sensation of mastery prevails.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER THREE THE GENERALLY ACCEPTED SOLUTION: MUSCULAR MOVEMENT
-
-
-CONSERVATION OF HEALTH A PRIME FACTOR IN THE SOLUTION
-
-Truly, necessity is the mother of invention. At the dawn of the present
-commercial age, the finger movement and even the slightly improved
-combined movement were forced to give way to some method more rapidly
-executed. Whole arm movement also proved inadequate. The method that
-has made the commercialization of penmanship possible is that of
-muscular movement. By this method only are the fingers relieved from
-furnishing the power which should rightly come from the large muscles
-of the arm. Muscular movement, as applied to writing, is a rotary
-motion with the large muscles of the forearm for a center while the
-fingers, though not held rigid, are not permitted any movement of their
-own. This movement takes place from the shoulder, the pivotal point,
-with the weight of the arm resting on the desk. Muscular movement
-method does not emphasize prescribed forms so much as proper method of
-execution.
-
-It is no special wonder that the leading educators of the day are now
-investigating penmanship. Changing from the slant to vertical, and now
-again to the slant, what is the average teacher to conclude? What shall
-she teach indeed if she is convinced at all regarding any system of
-penmanship, or is qualified to teach any method?
-
-The person who makes practical use of penmanship, the one who uses it
-to help him earn his daily bread, points the way. It matters not if
-he calls it muscular movement or if he ever saw a penmanship teacher.
-Watch such a person and observe his method. Observation will reveal
-that practically all use what we term a muscular movement slant method.
-It takes the practical person only a short time to discover the method
-that will best conserve energy, economize time, and, above all, lead
-to writing which will prove readable and attractive. It is a method of
-such character as fulfills all necessary requirements and thus proves
-the useful tool.
-
-Because we are a practical people, the public is now looking forward
-to results from the formal writing lesson. Teachers should expect the
-same degree of excellence to come from penmanship instruction as from
-correct teaching of mathematics, history, reading, or any other subject
-in the curriculum.
-
-It has been remarked many times that commercial schools and business
-men have put the stamp of approval upon the muscular-movement-slant
-method rather than upon any other. The reason is obvious. In fact,
-commercial schools have been the missing link between the oft-times
-theoretical public school and the actual business world. Commercial
-schools have found it possible during their short course of six or
-eight months to give our elementary school pupils an asset that the
-public schools have failed to bestow in as many years.
-
-With the present day crowded curriculum it has been found necessary
-to adopt some method by which the time consumed in the preparation of
-the written lessons might be shortened. Again muscular movement slant
-method came to the rescue, this time to the elementary school pupils.
-
-There is a certain amount of energy available in the nervous system.
-Discreet use of this energy is a lesson dearly bought by many. The
-automatic writing habit conserves energy and prevents diffusion of
-effort. In writing one’s thoughts, the mind should be occupied only
-in rendering the thought into correct English. To be truly useful the
-art of writing must finally be done with the muscles and not with brain
-energy. That we may save any draught on the intellectual power we
-should be entirely unconscious of the execution of the forms.
-
-Men are constantly at work in the business world devising schemes
-whereby energy and time may be economized. Cannot the schools do their
-share in this great scheme for the betterment of humanity? We should
-teach pupils an energy-saving manner of expressing themselves upon
-paper. How much useless nerve force is applied daily by pupils of all
-ages in forcing the pen along with the fingers in such a way that it is
-only less painful to the observer than to the performer? Why not try
-to assist in ending this useless waste of energy in the school world
-by directing a reasonable amount of energy into the correct channel?
-How much of our energy is misdirected daily when we should be making
-it our ally? We should fund and capitalize all energy, and at last
-live at ease upon the interest. The more details we can hand over to
-automatism, the more our higher powers of mind will be set free for
-greater work.
-
-Children are the nation’s most valuable asset. Vision is the first
-faculty in order of importance. How can it be best conserved? A proper
-regard for the future usefulness of the eyes of the pupils requires
-that a departure be made from the method now prevalent of demanding so
-much written work. A keen observer who realizes the true nature of a
-child will postpone the requirement of written language and fine print
-reading until a time when the more delicate eye muscles are properly
-developed and able to stand the strain. Muscular movement writing makes
-conservation of vision possible because it demands first, last and
-always, correct posture and proper lighting.
-
-Nearsight is frequently brought on by straining the eyes to see
-objects, and especially small blackboard writing, at a distance. Light
-shining on the board causes a glare, and when pupils are sitting so
-that the work on the board is seen at a trying angle the result is
-harmful to the eye. All work placed on the board during a penmanship
-demonstration, or at any other time, should be executed large enough
-and with lines so bold that pupils in the rear of the room may see it
-plainly without eye strain.
-
-Correct posture while writing precludes a tendency toward curvature
-of the spine, and also saves the eyes unnecessary strain. Numberless
-people sit and write more hours than they walk or ride. Who would
-presume to question the value of correct posture while walking, in
-its relation to good health? We are painfully inconsistent, when the
-writing habit is in operation, with regard to many of the laws that
-make for good health.
-
-Only as we work toward the saving of energy for ourselves and others
-are we keeping step with the progressives who are teaching conservation
-from the kitchen to forestry. Surely our aim should be the greatest
-accomplishment with the least expenditure of energy.
-
-
-ECONOMY OF TIME A RESULT OF THE SOLUTION
-
-Second only in importance to conserving the health by economizing
-energy through muscular movement is the time saving element. People
-who would recoil from ordinary thieving are often guilty of dishonesty
-of a kind that is closely akin thereto. We joke over our own poor
-handwriting and moan over that of our friends, yet we would be greatly
-startled were we actually to compute the number of priceless hours
-wasted every day by busy people trying to decipher illegible writing.
-Not only time but temper as well is destroyed. Quite as painful, only
-less annoying, to the economist of time is the accurately drawn script
-that we know consumed fully three times as much time as should have
-been required for its execution.
-
-In many schools we find that the method of executing written lessons is
-not equal to the need. Then also, we have pupils taking several times
-as long as should be required for written spelling or composition.
-Muscular movement will reduce several fold the time necessary for all
-written work and the benefits will not end there, for better quality in
-the content will result. The pupil will be left free to dictate and the
-hand will obey quite unconsciously.
-
-We constantly hear the plea, “We cannot teach writing; we have not the
-time.” Would it not be well to make some computations at this point?
-Compare a class or school that uses a good muscular movement, acquired
-through a formal writing lesson of from twenty to thirty minutes daily,
-with a class in which penmanship is hit or miss. The latter irregular
-habit always results in an irregular slant and finger movement. Judge
-then if it would not be well to teach pupils to save time. We carefully
-consider how to minimize waste of energy in a machine. Is the human
-machine of less importance?
-
-Since penmanship is used largely as a vehicle for expression to convey
-the mental product to others, is it not reasonable that we employ the
-easiest and speediest method of transportation? It is convenient to be
-master of a method that can record thought as fast as the mind shapes
-it. The right method will aid thought, not impede it.
-
-Henry Maxwell, as a workman, began to study the length of time he
-required to each part of a job. He kept a record and studied it. He
-then busied himself seeing where he could cut down all unnecessary
-strokes. He found that on a certain six hour job all but two hours
-and forty-seven minutes were consumed by bad planning, poor tools,
-and needless movements. Maxwell, as a master craftsman, is one of the
-all too rare people who are setting things in order. Everything can
-be provided more easily as a result of the work of a man like him. He
-opens up the possibility of leisure through the saving of labor.
-
-Assuming that not more than five or ten minutes were saved by the pupil
-during each written lesson, think of the total saving per day, per
-week, per month, not to mention the saving of time to that same man or
-woman when his school life is over and school of real life begins.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER FOUR PREPARATION OF THE TEACHER
-
-
-THE TECHNIQUE OF THE SUBJECT
-
-To fit oneself from year to year for the ever increasingly difficult
-task of teaching is a serious problem. We are to some extent
-compensated in a material way; our chief payment, however, is in
-the consciousness that through newly acquired knowledge our methods
-are improved, and the reflection is mirrored in the quality of our
-work. That methods presuppose a knowledge of the subject matter, is
-necessarily as true in the science of muscular movement penmanship as
-in other subjects less homely and less practical. The indispensable
-accompaniment is inspiring instruction suited to the inculcation
-of the proper habit on the part of the class. Too often we forget
-that anything that is worth possessing is paid for in strokes of
-daily effort. By neglecting the necessary concrete labor, by sparing
-ourselves the daily effort, we are standing in the way of obtaining the
-desired final results.
-
-All will agree that results speak. Shall we not then be repaid for
-our trouble when pupils mirror the reflection of our labor? Having
-personally mastered the difficulties of the subject, the teacher and
-supervisors are aware of the pitfalls which await the pupils. Only then
-do we cease to be theorists and become capable of demonstrating the
-truth of our methods. Uniformly good results may be obtained in almost
-any class if proper instructions are followed. If we are not obtaining
-good results in the product our methods are at fault. Could a teacher
-without knowledge of reading or of numbers devise suitable methods for
-presenting reading or numbers? Surely, the teacher cannot teach that
-which he does not know, be the subject penmanship or astronomy. Neither
-is the ambitious teacher content with a partial knowledge of any
-subject. Unless intensive knowledge of a subject obtains, no teacher
-will be able to follow successfully second hand methods.
-
-It is significant that the Normal Schools require their graduates to
-qualify in the useful art of practical penmanship. Many teachers have
-found that the correspondence method is well suited to and fulfills
-their needs for a complete penmanship training. Universities now offer
-summer courses in penmanship. Supervisors frequently give weekly drill
-classes for unqualified teachers upon which attendance is obligatory or
-optional. It is the regret of many of our best teachers who have been
-in the service for some years that they did not have opportunity or
-were not required to qualify in penmanship earlier in their educational
-career. Unless an inexperienced teacher knows how to teach intuitively,
-ludicrous blunders will be made. If knowledge be lacking regarding any
-branch, the quality of the young teacher’s work will be still less
-desirable. The everlasting _how_ will confront the teacher every day,
-and each time it will be necessary to find an answer.
-
-It is unfortunate for our schools that so many teachers feel that they
-can succeed in teaching penmanship without themselves knowing how to
-write. To know only the first few principles will not be sufficient,
-though they are not to be underestimated. To complete the structure
-we must build upon the firm foundation of first principles a crude
-but proper framework. When this is firmly reinforced, we put on the
-finishing touches. Many do not get further than the foundation; others
-stop at the next important stage, the crude product; while others who
-are persevering work to the end and have the satisfaction of enjoying
-the beautiful structure complete.
-
-
-THE ABILITY TO SECURE RESULTS
-
-There are few successful teachers who are not good psychologists and
-who therefore do not know the process by which growth is secured.
-Knowledge is the cornerstone of the foundation. However it is not
-enough that we know the subject which we are to teach; we must have the
-ability to impart knowledge that the self-activity of the pupils may
-induce growth.
-
-All teachers are not endowed alike with this wonderful gift. It is
-also a truism that to realize one’s shortcomings in this direction is
-the first step. If the pupils are not interested, and response cannot
-be obtained, let us look for the direct cause in the teacher and for
-the indirect cause in the supervisor. The far seeing teacher will aim
-to surround the penmanship lesson with the proper atmosphere at the
-outset. As pupils are more interested in seeing what is done than by
-abstract explanation, a few skillful and telling strokes at the desk
-or on the blackboard will serve as a much greater inspiration than for
-the pupils to come into the room and sit before a model that has been
-executed while they were out of sight.
-
-Skillful questioning and holding the entire class for answers is
-of great advantage when visualizing letter forms, and again when
-criticising and comparing results. The laws of cause and effect operate
-in penmanship as surely as they operate elsewhere. What is the cause
-of incorrect slant, a heavy stroke or a careless form? Pupils who know
-how to think may be put on the right road by being taught to criticize
-their own work.
-
-It is one thing to impart the knowledge one may possess of correct
-execution; the obtaining of results is quite another. Many a teacher
-has been greatly discouraged when a view of the results was obtained
-because close observation revealed that pupils had not comprehended the
-idea which the teacher intended to convey. Let us adopt new methods or
-modify old ones until desirable results are obtained. The pupils are
-placed under our care that they may have an opportunity to gain some of
-the knowledge and skill of which we, as teachers, are supposed to be in
-possession.
-
-The best proof that the imparting has been clear, logical, and
-effective is in the quality of the results so easily observed in the
-penmanship class. Every lesson is a new record of what has already been
-grasped by the pupils or a presentation of something new, or better
-still, a combination of both. Enthusiasm is one of the most essential
-points to be gained by the class. It must actually be experienced
-before it can be imparted to the pupil. If it is not felt by the
-teacher the next duty is to induce it by look and act.
-
-The unconscious influence of the teacher cannot be measured. With
-pupils, teachers are more than ideals; they are realities. The
-personal influence is more lasting than the particular system that
-is taught. A competent teacher must be the master of the situation.
-Little inspiration can be created by the timid teacher. Originality,
-individuality, attractive personality, courage, confidence, ease of
-manner, firmness, tact, initiative--these are desirable assets for the
-penmanship leader. Such a leader has a ready following.
-
-A penmanship teacher must balance enthusiasm with tact, system, and
-resourcefulness, and be ever on the alert to discover the individual
-needs. Tact plays a very important part in penmanship instruction for
-by the exercise of it we are led to say and do the right thing at the
-right time.
-
-True, we get no more out of this subject than we put into it. Let
-us be more pedagogical in imparting this subject. Let us outline a
-penmanship lesson as carefully as we would other lessons. The result
-will justify the labor.
-
-
-THE PENMANSHIP PERSPECTIVE
-
-Penmanship is entirely too isolated, and the value of cooperation and
-correlation are not sufficiently recognized. Young America demonstrated
-this perfectly when at the beginning of a written spelling test he
-asked if he should write it with muscular movement or with his “real
-writin’.” To him the drill that was supposed to make for the correct
-writing habit had not taken hold. He failed to associate the practice
-method with practical work. Again, great tact must be exercised in the
-attempt to correlate the penmanship with other subjects, lest in an
-unguarded moment a teacher may tire the pupils and thus defeat the much
-sought-for end.
-
-Colonel Parker says: “The present trend of study, investigation, and
-discovery in the science of education is toward the correlation and
-unification of educative subjects and their concentration upon human
-development. All subjects, means and modes of study are concentrated
-under this doctrine upon the economization of educative effort.”
-
-Persistence on the part of the teacher is absolutely essential, for
-pupils will forget and must be constantly reminded. If on all occasions
-the teacher of English or other subjects will bring a due amount of
-pressure to bear upon the class during all written recitations and take
-the proper share of responsibility, good results will be rapidly noted.
-On the other hand, we should have scant respect for the penmanship
-teacher who habitually uses poor English and who is not pedagogical in
-the presentation of the subject.
-
-Since it is common to evaluate subjects in terms of credits, would not
-a system of daily credits in writing tend to dignify the subject? Would
-not this react upon the pupil in a desirable way? As the matter now
-stands in many schools no credit is given to encourage; only complaints
-are heard when the work is not up to standard.
-
-We do know that all pupils who enter the commercial department of our
-public schools soon take it for granted that penmanship is a part of
-their stock in trade. The laws of necessity are plainly followed. These
-pupils have credits for penmanship.
-
-In the requirements for good penmanship, consistency should be
-shown from the lowest to the highest. The closest cooperation from
-the superintendent down to the first grade teacher is urged. Set a
-standard, and bring the pupils up to it, as is done in other subjects.
-One grade teacher may teach well, another poorly or indifferently, and
-thus the pupils are passed along. The school system where this prevails
-may be compared to a chain with now and then a weak link. Unless there
-is unity and cooperation among teachers the subject suffers greatly.
-The right kind of supervision is helpful, but it cannot accomplish all
-things. Not infrequently we hear the remark, “I am not the penmanship
-teacher; Miss So-and-so teaches all the penmanship.” Our “second
-speech” is too important a matter to be left to one person unaided.
-Upon whose shoulders shall be placed the responsibility? If a school
-does remarkably excellent or noticeably poor work in any subject, whose
-is the reward or the blame?
-
-The proper attitude of the Superintendent and the principal will go
-far to popularize any subject, penmanship no less than any other. This
-attitude will be reflected unconsciously upon the teacher, and the
-pupils will be quick to take the cue.
-
-How often is the muscular movement writing supervisor told by the
-boys in particular, “My father writes that way.” The right attitude
-is established immediately because the boy sees the relation of the
-school to a practical need. In fact, parental influence is a factor to
-be reckoned with in penmanship and the thoughtful teacher will do well
-to inquire into the attitude of the parents toward this useful art.
-Many times it means leverage for the teacher. In case the pupil is old
-enough to realize a motive for improving, the influence of the teacher
-alone may be sufficient. On the other hand, the boy frequently decides
-to follow the occupation or trade of his father, without regard to
-capacity or aptitude. Vocational guidance is essential.
-
-In the consideration of this subject, by parents, superintendents,
-principals, and teachers, let us not forget that we are living in a
-rapidly changing age, that we should ever be on the alert to study the
-present day needs, and that an open mind is essential to progress.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER FIVE SUITABLE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
-
-
-TEXT
-
-When the conclusion has been reached that some muscular movement system
-should be followed in order to inculcate the best writing habit, it
-still remains to select the text. Great care should be taken in this.
-A satisfactory text should abound in instructions to be read until
-fully understood, and illustrated with a sufficient number of models to
-answer all purposes of visualization. The text should be of convenient
-size; the drills and cuts should be arranged in a logical manner. The
-instructions should be in such simple language that all pupils can
-comprehend them. A manual with model forms only for the lower grades
-would prove very helpful, the teacher supplying the instruction. First
-grade pupils should write on the blackboard, but only from correct
-models placed there by the teacher in the presence of the pupils. Many
-primary grade educators favor no writing in the first grade except
-such as is taught from the board.
-
-She would be far more than an ordinary teacher who could give a class
-of pupils (without the help of a text) the pictures in her own mind in
-a sufficiently clear and vivid manner to result in correctly executed
-work on the part of the pupil. Surely all reasonable aids should be
-given pupils in their efforts to learn penmanship. A good text is as
-much needed in this as in any other subject. We should laugh at the
-idea of teaching arithmetic or English without the aid of the text; yet
-many good school people seem to think writing can be absorbed in some
-mysterious manner from more or less indefinite word pictures and a few
-blackboard copies done in a more or less skillful manner.
-
-Again we hear of schools that arrogate unto themselves the right
-to change the author’s plan, or to accept it in part, frequently
-omitting the most important and vital points. There is no unity and no
-consistency in this manner of doing things. McMurray’s question and
-answer along this line is pertinent when he says, “What should be the
-attitude of the young student toward the authorities that he studies?”
-The answer is, “Certainly, authors are, as a rule, more mature and far
-better informed upon the subjects that they discuss than he, otherwise
-he would not be pursuing them.”
-
-
-BLACKBOARD AND THE USE OF IT
-
-Much may be said for and against the use of the blackboard. At best,
-it cannot supplant the use of the text. To begin with, the blackboard
-models are liable to be executed hurriedly and therefore poorly; and
-again these models, however correct, are not seen by all at the same
-angle. A slate or glass board is to be preferred. This should be placed
-low enough for all pupils to reach easily. All wall space, including
-that between the windows, should be utilized for blackboard. When
-pupils are copying writing from the board the window shades should be
-adjusted in such a manner that the pupils’ eyes do not suffer from the
-glare.
-
-Good blackboard writing on the part of the teacher points its own
-moral. The teacher has less teaching to do. Pupils imitate almost
-every school room procedure from the teacher’s dress and mannerisms
-to her writing. Fortunately it is much easier to write well upon the
-blackboard than upon paper and no possible excuse can be offered that
-will cover poor board writing on the part of either teacher or pupil.
-
-Good work on the board serves as an attraction to the subject since the
-pupils are always interested in seeing the creation of a skillful hand.
-It is also indispensable in studying the construction of letters and
-the teacher who can execute freely and rapidly at the board possesses
-a most valuable asset. When proper visualization has taken place,
-that is, when the mental photograph has been acquired by exposing the
-lens of the eye sufficiently long, it is well to erase the model or
-constructive lines and refer to the models in the text, since these are
-what the pupil will aim to approach. All work placed upon the board
-should be in exact harmony with the system in use at the writing hour,
-since example is more than precept and pupils gain unconsciously by
-seeing the correct forms before them.
-
-[Illustration: BLACKBOARD POSITION]
-
-Just as we have pictures that exert a correct moral influence hung
-in the rooms and halls, and mottoes containing beautiful sentiments
-ever before us, so should we place the correct written forms before
-the pupil. Again, note the effect of regular written work done in an
-incorrect manner! Pupils will be very apt to draw the conclusion that
-the models used during the writing lesson and real work are two
-different matters. Frequently the grade teacher will apologize to the
-supervisor for the appearance of the copy. This does not raise her in
-the estimation of her class, but rather calls their attention to her
-short-comings. By spending a few minutes daily for a month any teacher
-may develop such excellent blackboard work that no apologies should be
-necessary.
-
-Pupils who are discouraged in penmanship will find that good results
-may be obtained very easily at the board. They must be taught at the
-outset, however, that the movement at the board and that required
-at the seat is quite different. Form, rhythm, and slant should be
-developed first at the board, as these three points _are_ in common. By
-listening to the teacher’s criticism of blackboard results, pupils will
-easily become more critical of their own work.
-
-Points to be observed in a blackboard lesson:
-
-1. The teacher should be able to make for each pupil a correct copy in
-the presence of the class.
-
-2. Pupils should stand with the left side turned slightly toward the
-board to insure slant writing, and prepare to write as high as the
-eyes. Make movement for the exercises in the air yet almost touching
-the copy first, in order to gain correct size and spacing.
-
-3. All pupils should write to the teacher’s count or dictation. Require
-much concert work at the board. Keep the lips closed and thus avoid
-breathing dust from the crayon. Hold the crayon between the thumb, and
-first and second fingers, allowing the end not in contact with the
-board to extend toward the center of the palm.
-
-4. Straight strokes and ovals on correct slant will serve as a basis
-upon which to build all letters and words. Pupils should step along
-with the work as it is executed on the board, and thus keep correct
-alignment.
-
-5. Pupils should be taught to do board work carefully, whether it be a
-writing exercise or regular work. Develop all difficult new drills at
-the board first. Suppose the class numbers forty; allow twenty to pass
-to the board for a ten minute period, if twenty minutes is the time
-allotted for a writing lesson. The groups at the seats should be taught
-to do the counting for or with the teacher, also to be alert for all
-errors in posture, slant and form.
-
-6. It is very important that the line should be made strong enough that
-it may be seen easily from the rear of the room without eye strain. The
-writing should be large enough to be seen easily from any point in the
-room.
-
-7. When erasing use a downward stroke. Lift the eraser on the upward
-stroke. This allows the dust to drop in the trough; a good signal is,
-“Erase,” “Lift,” “Erase,” “Lift,” or “Down,” “Lift,” “Down,” “Lift.”
-
-
-PAPER
-
-“A workman is known by his tools.” It is as essential that good
-material be supplied for the penmanship as that any other department
-be well supplied as regards quality and quantity. Not only should good
-paper, pencils, pens and ink be used during the formal lessons each
-day, but in every lesson wherein writing is used to carry on the other
-work. Permit no scribbling, utilize every line, keep paper in neat
-folders; thus economize in the right manner, and not by the purchase of
-poor equipment, which is an irritation to teacher and pupil alike. The
-difference in cost of good and poor material is slight when compared
-with the results.
-
-Paper should be of such quality that the pen will not pick up the
-fiber and cause blots. The proper ruling for penmanship paper is
-three-eighths of an inch (26 points). Size of letters and space between
-letters will be more easily developed by the use of the ruling
-suggested than by the use of unruled paper. Only in upper grades where
-good work obtains should an attempt be made to use unruled paper for
-the writing lesson. Size of sheets for lower grades should be not more
-than six by eight inches. Upper grades may use a sheet eight by ten and
-one-half inches. Writing on thick tablets should not be permitted. Use
-loose sheets of paper, always having the top sheet padded by one or two
-extra ones beneath to save wearing the penpoint needlessly.
-
-
-FOLDERS
-
-Each pupil should have a heavy paper folder in which to keep all
-writing material. The use of such a folder saves much time in the
-passing of material.
-
-
-PENCILS
-
-If pencils are used in the first or second grade they should be large,
-and cylindrical in form (never octagonal), and of medium soft lead. The
-writing period should not be taken up with the sharpening of pencils.
-Erasers should not be allowed. Lead pencils are not at best conducive
-to movement beyond the ovals and strokes. The use of the cheap tablet,
-the bane of the teacher’s life, and the poor quality lead pencil do
-much to hinder application of the correct writing habit in the lower
-grades.
-
-
-PENS
-
-A coarse, flexible pen (never a fountain or a stub pen) should be used
-by all teachers of muscular movement writing. Pens are dipped in oil
-before being boxed; for that reason when taking a new pen it is best to
-dampen it and remove the oil. Many a blot will be saved by so doing.
-Dip in the ink until the hole in the pen is partly or entirely filled
-with ink. When touching to the paper, be sure that both nibs come in
-contact, and are made to wear evenly. Each pupil should have his own
-pencil or pen, for sanitary reasons, as well as because no two persons
-wear a pen in exactly the same manner. After the lesson is ended the
-pen should be wiped on a penwiper. Removing the ink, which contains
-acid, will cause the pen to last longer, and a clean pen will do better
-work than one clogged with sediment. Pupils should never drop the
-pen to the bottom of the inkwell in order to get ink; this ruins the
-penpoint and causes unnecessary noise. A good penpoint should last
-from eight to fourteen hours or longer if properly treated. Inkwells
-should be filled frequently.
-
-
-PENHOLDER
-
-A penholder of wood, or one tipped with cork, is preferred. No learner
-should be permitted to use a metal tipped penholder. On account of the
-pressure that must be exerted in order to keep the metal penholder from
-slipping, proper relaxation of the hand cannot take place. Frequently
-the metal rusts or is so heavy that the penholder is a burden to the
-inexperienced.
-
-
-BLOTTER
-
-Each child should be provided with a blotter. It is well to let the ink
-dry as the pen spreads it on the paper except in case of a blot. Many
-pupils have the habit of taking the blotter in the hand and of giving
-the page a series of slaps with it, in quick succession; instead of
-taking up the ink this merely blurs the page. The correct way is to
-place the blotter on the line, give it an even pressure, and lift it,
-never moving it while the pressure is being applied.
-
-
-INK
-
-Use the best fluid ink obtainable. Ink made from crystals or powder is
-less satisfactory. It should be dark blue or black and flow freely.
-Bottles and inkwells should be kept closed when not in use. If the air
-is excluded the ink does not thicken. Occasionally water may be added,
-but great care must be taken in reducing ink that it be not made too
-thin.
-
-
-ECONOMY IN THE USE OF MATERIAL
-
-School boards and officials are generally willing to procure good
-supplies if economy is practiced in the use of them. For the sake
-of uniformity, and that every child may have an equal chance, it is
-advisable for the school to furnish all material for writing. Pupils
-frequently do not use proper discrimination in their purchases, when
-the matter of supplies is left to them.
-
-Lastly, it is a mistake to think that good results can be obtained
-with poor material. In building any structure that we hope to last a
-lifetime we are careful to supply ourselves with the best of material.
-This principle applies in rearing the penmanship structure.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER SIX SOME WORKABLE SUGGESTIONS
-
-
-HOW TO STUDY
-
-Observe the board demonstration. Trace text correctly: Capitals twelve
-times, words six times and sentences three times, at correct speed.
-Write at correct speed one-half minute, one minute, or two minutes as
-required. Compare with models. Test and grade.
-
-How to study capital letters: Height, three-fourths space high; slant,
-same as strokes; width, wider or narrower than single ovals; beginning
-stroke, how and where; end stroke, how and where; speed of letter
-studied; name a variety of counts and select the most pleasing; analogy
-to other letters; name as many points as can be observed that are
-peculiar to the letter under discussion.
-
-How to study words and sentences: Slant must be the same as strokes;
-letters must be of uniform height; space between letters uniform and
-equal to an oval of the same relative size as the small letter; end
-strokes curve upward; beginning strokes start under end of strokes of
-previous word; study especially the most difficult letter.
-
-
-HOW TO MOVE AND SLANT THE PAPER
-
-Check each line for capitals into thirds, place four or five letters in
-a third; move paper to the left about two inches at each check mark,
-at the same time say aloud, “Move.” At the end of the line say, “New
-line.” This should be the invariable rule during the concert count.
-This makes for uniformity of slant; it gives the class a chance to
-help, and relieves the teacher. In making four hundred ovals, say
-“Move,” at each quarter. Slant the paper so that the line written upon
-runs from corner to corner of the desk.
-
-Second grade: Check in middle, and move paper once only. Second and
-third grades make two hundred ovals and strokes per line.
-
-
-BLACKBOARD WORK OF THE PUPILS
-
-(Explained in detail in Chapter Five.) Pupils affected: first and
-second grades especially. On Monday all poor writers in any grade work
-at the board and perfect the new letters or sentence for the week.
-Suggested procedure for any grade:
-
-Place a model (two in lower grades) for each pupil.
-
-Demonstrate briefly the letter.
-
-Class face board, trace with right forefinger, teacher and class
-counting.
-
-Trace with chalk, six or more times. Erase.
-
-Make drill to count.
-
-Class criticize and answer questions.
-
-Introduce simple test lines to prove to class that work measures up to
-standard.
-
-Personal help.
-
-Upper grade pupils should not spend more than one-half to two-thirds
-of the period at the board, then they should go directly to seats and
-make the good forms just learned function on paper. In all applied work
-at the board, hold pupils equally as responsible for correct forms and
-neat legible writing as in seat writing.
-
-Position at the board: Turn the left side slightly toward the board,
-allow left hand to hang or to hold the eraser. Write as high as the
-eyes. Use signal, “Stand erect,” “Turn,” “Face,” “Down”; the last
-signal to be given when the teacher desires to see all the work at the
-board.
-
-Good line quality is largely the result of working at correct speed
-throughout the drill period, for by so doing even pressure is exerted,
-and pleasing quality is the result.
-
-The eraser should be drawn downward from the top line to the groove,
-holding it parallel with the groove. This permits the chalk dust to
-fall where it should. Lift the eraser and repeat, always drawing from
-the top line downward.
-
-
-NAME CARDS
-
-By the fifth week of school, name cards should be provided for each
-pupil. Paste at the ends in front or back of the compendium. (Pasted in
-this way they may be easily removed.) Trace names daily at the seats.
-
-First grade children trace names daily at the board until they can be
-legibly written.
-
-
-FIGURES
-
-Figures are to be practiced daily by making from one to two lines of
-the date. Figures are one-half space high in the first four grades,
-one-third space high in the remaining grades.
-
-
-ALPHABET
-
-The alphabet should have a place on the board in each room by the end
-of the first week of school. It will prove very convenient if the speed
-for each letter is placed near in small figures. New and unqualified
-teachers may ask the supervisor to place the alphabet on the board the
-first term.
-
-
-ENDURANCE TESTS
-
-Pupils should be taught to compare their work frequently with the
-standard penmanship chart, a copy of which should be on the wall of
-each room. In this way they are able to rate themselves for quality.
-Before the end of the first term pupils should be able to endure a
-dictation of words or sentences for one minute, at the proper speed,
-with ease and in good posture and with fairly good forms. The seventh
-month should find them able to take a two minute endurance test with
-greater ease and better forms.
-
-
-THE “Z” GROUP
-
-The Z group in first and second grades should receive proper
-consideration. Above the 2 B it has been demonstrated that the Z
-classes, so far as writing is concerned, are not far behind others in
-their work. When necessary, cut the content, lower the speed, repeat
-more often your instructions, count more, and expect less perfection in
-form.
-
-
-OBJECTIVES IN GOOD WRITING HABITS
-
-_Good posture_: health, appearance, efficiency.
-
-_Speed_: For accuracy and efficiency, both practical needs.
-
-_Spacing_: To relieve the eye, and make easy reading.
-
-_Slant_: To make writing attractive and easy to read.
-
-_Neatness_: To further a civic need.
-
-_Tracing_: To visualize and thereby assist in acquiring correct form.
-
-_Movement drills_: Ovals for curves, strokes for slant, small letters
-for traveling movement.
-
-
-PROGRESS LESSON
-
-_Time_: Friday or the last lesson of the week.
-
-_Conditions_: Class must know how to study. Class must work fairly well
-independently. Class must have had all drills demonstrated.
-
-_Method_: Place problems on the board, numbered, not less than two
-nor more than four, unless the class is very efficient. Each pupil
-starts with No. 1. Teacher passes down aisle, gives a progress check
-if work is satisfactory, if not, a criticism. (A rubber stamp marked
-“Improving” is very effective.) If checked, pupil takes next drill; if
-not he practices the same drill until the teacher comes again. In a
-fifteen minute period the teacher can check up the room at least three
-times. Those who receive a check every time receive special recognition.
-
-_Object_: To encourage initiative; to impress upon each pupil his rank
-in the writing game; to crystallize the week’s work; to give each pupil
-an opportunity for individual help.
-
-
-SEGREGATION
-
-(Explained in detail in Chapter Two.) The teaching of penmanship is
-less laborious and more effective when the poor writers are separated
-from the good writers. Many pupils need no individual help, but follow
-oral instructions easily. They should be allowed to do so, since
-independent effort will develop judgment, initiative, industry, and
-an appreciation of how to “play the game square.” The segregation of
-the poor writers in rows economizes the teacher’s time and energy in
-passing about the room, and ultimately allows each pupil to practice
-upon the drill he most needs. While the poor writers should never be
-considered in disgrace, a legitimate aim should be to get into the good
-division on the regular promotion day, preferably Friday.
-
-Segregation is especially desirable for board work, since it economizes
-the time and energy of the teacher to a marked degree.
-
-
-LINE QUALITY
-
-_At the seat_: Make not less than 200 solid two-space ovals or
-strokes with one dip of ink. This will make for neatness. Allow no
-strike-overs, i. e., patched lines. Correct position of the hand,
-correct speed, a limited amount of ink, and a good movement are the
-surest remedies for neatness and good line quality. Always use two
-sheets of paper in order to obtain the best line quality and save the
-pen. Hold pen with hole on top so that both nibs touch the paper, in
-order to secure even quality. Hold pen or pencil lightly enough that it
-may be slipped out easily from the hand.
-
-
-SAMPLES
-
-Monthly samples have a place in and above the third grade. Make two
-or more samples on the 15th of each month, during the writing period.
-Select the best one and place in the manila envelope provided for this
-purpose only. Place name of pupil on envelope. Collect at the close of
-the period. Place rubber band around them and file in your desk.
-
-_Object_: Teachers may judge the effectiveness of their instruction;
-pupils may observe their own improvement; the grade of the pupil is to
-be partially based on this work; the supervisor may be able to advise
-constructively; the pupil has an opportunity to compete with himself.
-
-_Procedure_: Have paper cut, and sample on board, memorized. Give
-warming up exercises of ovals, capital, name, and small _o_ exercise.
-Consume five or more minutes in this way. Use your watch, time the
-class. Record the speed on the sample. After each sample, relax. Make
-two or three, as time permits. Select the best. Discard others. Open
-sample envelopes, compare with sample of month before. Give a check of
-honor to all who have improved to a marked degree. The first month,
-check for better movement, neatness and light line; second month,
-size, etc. Always hold for all points before considered. Tell class at
-end of checking what in general you see they need, and keep that in
-mind during the month. Count the pupils who have two samples and those
-who receive checks, ascertain your per cent of improvement and record
-it for reference next month. Collect sample envelopes and file in your
-desk.
-
-_Caution_: There is no objection to the giving of a day of practice
-to the matter contained in the sample during the month if the time
-permits; in fact, this would be helpful. However, on the 15th, the
-allotted time only should be allowed for writing the sample, which
-should proceed in general as above outlined.
-
-_Standard_: Third and fourth grades attain 50% improvement each month.
-Fifth and sixth grades should attain 66% improvement each month.
-Seventh and eighth grades should attain 75% improvement each month.
-
-
-PREPARATION FOR REGULAR VISIT OF THE SUPERVISOR
-
-First grade: Two models for every child at board.
-
-Second grade: After the second month a writing lesson saved from the
-previous week; after the third month, a spelling lesson.
-
-Third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth grades: Have on
-the desk ready for grading, the following: samples, spelling paper,
-language paper.
-
-Give pupils an opportunity to see that all work to be inspected is
-ready the day previous to the supervisor’s visit. (For ordinary lessons
-one minute is ample time for preparation if folders are kept in good
-order.) Placing one lesson of the applied work in the folio each week,
-from which the final selection is to be made, will serve to keep the
-work uniformly good. This would also provide specimens for those who
-might be absent for a particular lesson written expressly for this
-purpose.
-
-
-DESK ARRANGEMENT
-
- Aisle
-
- +---------------------------+ +---------------------------+
- | Oct. Spell. Sept. Sample | | Sept. Sample Oct. Spell. |
- | | | |
- | Oct. Lang. Oct. Sample | | Oct. Sample Oct. Lang. |
- +---------------------------+ +---------------------------+
-
-
-COUNTING
-
-In counting for words repeat the letters at correct speed, sentences
-likewise, using great care that the finish is within the time limit. In
-pronouncing spelling words to be used during penmanship drill, always
-require the class to repeat the words after you before writing. A short
-dictated sentence should be managed the same way.
-
-
-USE OF THE TIMEPIECE
-
-This is as necessary to the good teacher of penmanship as is the
-blackboard. By its use is obtained correct speed, alertness on the part
-of the teacher, good movement because never too slow, more rhythmical
-counting, and more practice accomplished. Use the second hand daily,
-until counting becomes automatic and goes forward with the right kind
-of speed at all times.
-
-
-AWARDS
-
-Honor rolls, buttons, certificates, pennants, cups, etc., prove a great
-incentive. All competition should be carried on in a friendly manner.
-
-
-USE OF STANDARD PENMANSHIP TESTS
-
-The research department may very profitably apply the standard tests
-throughout the city twice yearly, tabulate the results and publish them
-to teachers. From these findings, principals, supervisors, and teachers
-will be able to determine what the weaknesses are and find a remedy for
-them.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER SEVEN SUGGESTIONS FOR THE GRADES, JUNIOR AND SENIOR HIGH SCHOOLS
-
-
-A GENERAL, NOT A SPECIFIC PLAN
-
-In suggesting this plan no endeavor has been made to be definite,
-except in a few essentials. Writing texts and conditions in schools
-differ so greatly that this would be impossible. An effort has been
-made to build up from the first grade to the last a general plan of
-a logical character. Many suggestions made for the second and third
-grades could wisely be put into operation, in part, in the higher
-grades. It is assumed first that the muscular movement method has been
-adopted and that each child has the use of a manual, since that is the
-only condition under which an adaptation of these suggestions would be
-advisable. This bird’s eye view of the subject is not to be considered
-in any respect a “system” of writing, in text book phraseology.
-
-It will be impossible to advantageously adapt the suggested plan unless
-a comprehensive knowledge of muscular movement has already been gained
-through actual practice on the part of the teacher.
-
-
-FIRST GRADE
-
-Child nature is spontaneous, active, restless. It prefers objects to
-subjects, expression to repression and generality to detail. Writing
-is a slow and laborious method of expression compared to speech, and
-therefore not well suited to childhood. More oral, and less written
-language should be given primary grades. But so long as writing seems
-a necessary part of primary education, it should be taught in the most
-rational manner. To do this, it is necessary to consider the child, its
-capacity to acquire knowledge and skill, and its future welfare, as
-concerns health and handwriting.
-
-One very noticeable feature about the activity of childhood is the
-exercise of the larger muscles which it invariably involves. The
-movements are of the whole body, and not of mere portions of it. The
-fundamental muscles and not the delicate and finely coordinated muscles
-are employed in all their movements. Such muscles (the accessory) as
-are engaged in fine writing, drawing and sewing are developed later.
-Especially is this true of the muscles of the eye. Ignorance of these
-facts has led to mistakes in training.
-
-The wise teacher will not compel or permit young pupils to follow a
-fine copy in writing, but will encourage them to use the blackboard
-where abundant opportunity will be given for exercising the larger
-muscles. Proper regard for the future usefulness of the eyes of the
-child certainly requires that a departure be made from the method now
-prevalent of requiring so much written work.
-
-Childhood has been called the language period par excellence, but this
-statement has reference to oral and not written forms of speech. Every
-teacher knows how easily and rapidly the child gains a vocabulary at
-this stage. He learns language by imitation, and the whole epoch of
-childhood is, as psychology teaches, and William Wordsworth expresses
-it, “one endless imitation.” It therefore behooves the teacher to
-neglect, if anything, reading and writing during the early stage of
-childhood, and make play and story telling the predominant work in the
-years preceding eight.
-
-One of the most difficult as well as one of the most interesting
-problems that confronts every first grade teacher is what and how much
-of writing we shall do in the first year. Shall we use all our time
-teaching form? Shall we teach movement work entirely and let form
-alone? Or shall we try a combination of both?
-
-It is unfortunate that many of the courses of study which we must
-follow state specifically that when the pupils leave the first grade
-they must be able to write all the small letters, capital letters,
-words and sentences on paper. Some courses demand that pupils must
-do a certain amount of copying. This is very unfortunate, because in
-trying to fulfill the requirements of such a course of study any means
-available are often resorted to and frequently the methods used are a
-great hindrance to the future development of the child, both physically
-and mentally.
-
-The following suggestions are offered first grade teachers:
-
-Under proper instruction the pupils will go into the next grade with
-the ability to express themselves freely and easily at the blackboard.
-It is quite unnecessary and unpedagogical to teach children a habit
-that in the course of a few years must be given up entirely; reference
-is here made to teaching of finger movement in the first three grades.
-
-_One B grade aim_: To introduce pupils in this grade to all small
-letters in short words. To attain an average speed of thirty letters
-per minute.
-
-_One A grade aim_: To introduce pupils in this grade to all capital
-letter forms in families. To review all small letters in words and
-sentences. To attain a speed of thirty-five letters per minute. To
-give pupils by the end of the term, a tool for handling spelling and
-language in a satisfactory manner at the blackboard.
-
-_Material_: Compendium (optional), crayon, eraser. The blackboard
-should be ruled with lines four inches apart beginning at the
-bottom and extending six lines in height. Eighteen to twenty
-inches is sufficient board space for each child. More practice and
-correspondingly better results follow when the entire class is at the
-board at one time.
-
-_Length of lesson_: Fifteen minutes daily, five times per week. Place
-the period early in the day or just before spelling so that it may
-function. Writing is an inter-recitation activity. Practicing the daily
-lesson will be found very profitable.
-
-_Demonstration_: Each drill should be demonstrated briefly from one to
-three times each day of presentation. Blackboard models for tracing
-should be provided for each pupil daily. Good models are a necessity
-because of the inconvenience of using compendiums at the board.
-
-_Distribution of time to subject matter_: At the beginning of each term
-devote one-half to one-third of the lesson to movement drill. Tracing
-and writing consume the remainder of the period. As skill increases
-reduce the amount of time to one minute on movement drill and divide
-the remainder equally between words and sentences. The board should be
-filled ten times during one lesson. _One A_ children should fill the
-board once daily with the figure represented in the current date.
-
-_Names_: Pupils should write their names as early as possible in the
-term. After the capital “I” has been mastered use the following form
-for name practice: “I am (name).”
-
-_Z Group_: This group proceeds at a slower rate of speed, attaining at
-the end of the year scarcely thirty letters per minute. More frequent
-demonstration is necessary. Use as many two-letter words as possible.
-Select words from the reading as far as practicable. More blackboard
-work, tracing and rhythmic drill are necessary than in other classes.
-
-
-SECOND GRADE
-
-Primary teachers are frequently opposed to muscular movement because
-it is wholly impossible to obtain the same uniform work (which is
-really only useless drawing) as can be obtained by the finger movement
-plan. Not until principals, primary supervisors, and superintendents
-are willing to tell their primary teachers that they will not look for
-beautiful written exercises in these grades, will the teachers of the
-first, second, and third grades look with favor upon muscular movement.
-
-We do not expect the primary teacher to produce the finished
-mathematicians, readers, historians, or penmen, but such work as is
-accomplished should be based on the right foundation. The primary
-teacher should be willing to sacrifice her pride in the appearance
-of written exercises to the demands of the future environment of the
-grown child. In schools where superintendents and teachers insist upon
-pupils writing words or sentences on paper very soon after they enter
-school little or no advancement can be made in muscular movement.
-However, if movement is not taught at an early age much time will be
-wasted when the transition is made, which a few extreme persons say
-should not take place until the fifth year in school. In the latter
-case the pupils have incorrect habits so firmly fixed that it takes the
-remaining years in the elementary school to learn to write a creditable
-style.
-
-Board work may be continued advantageously daily in the second
-grade for a three or four minute period. The writing for the first
-month might very profitably be given over to board training to a
-large extent, retaining only five or six minutes daily to teach the
-physical-training phase of penmanship. Relaxation, correct posture
-of the body, feet, hands, and arms at the seat might be accomplished
-during the first month.
-
-The next step will be to study the hand and arm, making the preparatory
-movement for ovals, and strokes with the hand half open and gliding
-on the nails. The five knuckles must be turned toward the ceiling.
-Pupils should make the movement freely to the teacher’s count and also
-count for themselves in low tones. The teacher might use a book or a
-thin board to serve as a desk, with which to illustrate, in order to
-establish the proper relation in the child’s mind concerning the desk
-and the points of contact. (See detailed directions under posture,
-Chapter Two.) Pencil holding is next taught, using the handle end
-first, and pointing it half way between the shoulder and the elbow. It
-will take a month or more to develop relaxation, correct posture, and
-penholding.
-
-_Aim_: First month. To perfect the board writing. To review all
-capitals and small letter forms in words and sentences, and attain
-greater fluency and a higher degree of perfection in form. To attain a
-speed of forty letters per minute, the standard speed for this grade.
-To teach the form of the letters so well, that in the seat work next
-month when movement is the great problem, form may not need to be
-stressed, but will be a resource.
-
-Second month: To develop relaxation, correct posture, movement, and
-speed sufficient to prevent finger movement. To apply these fundamental
-principles to ovals, a few easy capitals, a limited number of words and
-a few short sentences. To make the correct writing habit carry over
-into the spelling by the end of the 2 B grade.
-
-_Comparison_: Save one of the pupil’s first lessons in both regular and
-applied work to be compared with later ones.
-
-_Material_: Canary paper, cut into half sheets, compendium, pencil,
-folio seven by nine inches. Keep only writing material in these folios.
-
-_Length of lesson_: Fifteen minutes daily, five times per week.
-Blackboard practice on the daily lesson is suggested as an
-inter-recitation activity. Place the writing period early in the day or
-prior to the spelling in order that it may function in the applied work.
-
-_Demonstration_: The same directions that are given under first grade
-for ruling boards and demonstration procedure will be found useful.
-
-_Z Group_: This group proceeds at a slower rate of speed than other
-groups and attains at the end of the 2 A a speed of thirty or more
-letters per minute instead of forty. Demonstrate more frequently. Use
-as many two-letter words as possible. Select words from the reading as
-far as practicable. More blackboard work, tracing and rhythmic drill
-are necessary than in other classes.
-
-_Distribution of time to subject matter_: During the first month give
-the greater part of the writing period to movement drills. For the
-following months spend one-half to one-third of the period on movement
-drills, the remainder being divided between capital letters and words
-and sentences.
-
-_Headings_: Use the following heading daily, placing it on the second
-blue line. Write on every line except the first below the heading.
-Model:
-
- John Brown, 2 A, Sept. 15, 1924.
-
-
-THIRD GRADE
-
-We will assume that all pupils so far advanced as the third grade
-are able to make all the letter forms easily and can write words and
-sentences upon the board. They should also be able to make straight
-strokes and ovals, write words, sentences, and the most necessary
-capitals with the right movement, at the seats. In both cases they
-should observe correct posture, slant, speed, uniformity, and spacing
-between words. They should recognize the difference between connective
-lines, and observe the following rule for spacing between letters and
-words: The space between letters should be the width of the distance
-between the down strokes in small _u_, the space between words should
-be the entire width of small _i_.
-
-Doctor Ayres has proved by comparing many specimens that one of the
-greatest drawbacks to legibility rests in the fact that the letters are
-crowded together. It would be better to allow extreme spacing rather
-than to permit the pupils to huddle the letters together using barely
-half as much space between letters as they should. The space around the
-letters relieves the eye of the reader, and makes even irregular and
-crudely formed words fairly legible. The pupils who have been well
-trained in movement can slide easily from one letter to another with
-the right-length connective stroke.
-
-Pupils at the beginning of the third year in school will often appear
-to have forgotten much that they have been taught in penmanship, as in
-other subjects. During the vacation the muscles have become somewhat
-tense, therefore relaxing exercises should be given frequently in order
-to regain what has been lost. (See directions under physical training
-phase, Chapter Two.) It will be well to give at least one week’s
-practice at the board, two short lessons daily. Review the letter
-forms, ending each lesson with a word. The second week have pupils take
-pens a few minutes daily and review ovals and strokes, preliminary to
-writing the exercises that will lead directly to word and sentence
-building.
-
-_Aim_: To develop relaxation, correct posture, easy movement,
-sufficient speed to prevent finger movement, and to apply these
-fundamental principles to all writing lessons, spelling and copy work.
-The grade is to be based upon whether or not the pupil uses the arm
-movement during penmanship, copy work and spelling. Grade “Failure” if
-movement is not used as above directed. Attain a speed of fifty letters
-per minute in words and sentences.
-
-_Material_: Compendium, white paper half sheets, coarse pen, penholder,
-ink, penwiper, blotter, manila envelope for sample, folio, seven by
-nine inches, in which penmanship material only is to be kept. Teachers
-should write pupils’ names on folios. On Mondays pass enough paper for
-the week.
-
-_Length of lesson_: Fifteen minutes daily, five times per week. After
-correct habits are established, encourage home practice. Place the
-penmanship period early in the day or prior to the spelling in order
-that it may function properly.
-
-_Distribution of time to subject matter_: During the first month
-give one-half or more of the time to good habit formation by use of
-movement drills. For the following months spend one-third of the period
-on ovals, little _o_, or the like, one-third on capital letters, and
-one-third on words and sentences.
-
-_Heading_: Place the following heading daily on the second blue line.
-Write on every line except the first below the heading. Model:
-
- John Brown, 3 B, Sept. 15, 1924.
-
-_Sample_: Memorize the following sample which is to be taken the middle
-of each month. Model:
-
- John Brown, 3 B, Sept. 15, 1924.
-
- John Doe School
- City, State.
- (Skip a line.)
- I use a free swing
- I use a free swing
- I use a free swing
-
-
-FOURTH GRADE
-
-The demand for more and better written work will become practically
-imperative in the fourth year. The child will be able to meet the
-demand because he will have nothing to undo, having spent all the time
-devoted to penmanship in working on a correct foundation. The efforts
-may be crude. However, technique in the beginning is of less importance
-than that the proper habits may be established. It will be necessary
-for the teacher of this grade to require of the pupils all that has
-been required before and to improve upon what has been done.
-
-_Aim_: To develop relaxation, correct posture, easy movement,
-sufficient speed to prevent finger movement and to apply these
-fundamental principles to all writing lessons, spelling, and copy
-work. The grade is to be based upon whether or not the pupil uses arm
-movement during the penmanship period, copy work, and spelling. Grade
-“Failure” if movement is not used as above directed. Attain a speed of
-sixty letters per minute in words and sentences.
-
-_Materials_: Compendium, white paper half sheets, coarse pen,
-penholder, ink, penwiper, blotter, manila envelopes for samples, folio
-seven by nine inches in which writing material only is to be kept.
-Teacher should label folios with name of pupil. On Monday pass enough
-paper for the week.
-
-_Length of lesson_: Twenty minutes daily, five times per week. After
-correct habits are established encourage home practice. Place the
-writing period early in the day or prior to the spelling in order that
-it may function properly.
-
-_Distribution of time to subject matter_: During the first month give
-one-half or more of the time to good habit formation by use of movement
-drills. For the remainder of the year spend one-third of the period on
-ovals, little _o_ drill, and the like, one-third on capital letters and
-one-third on words and sentences.
-
-_Heading_: Place the following heading daily on the second blue line.
-Write on every line except the first below the heading. Model:
-
- John Brown, 4 B, Sept. 15, 1924
-
-_Sample_: Memorize the following sample which is to be made the middle
-of each month. Model:
-
- John Brown, 4 B, Sept. 15, 1924
- John Doe School
- City, State
- (Skip a line)
- I use a free swing
- I use a free swing
- I use a free swing
-
-
-FIFTH GRADE
-
-Since pupils in the fifth grade are better developed mentally and
-physically than those in the preceding grade we may reasonably expect
-a better quality of penmanship from them. In this grade especially,
-pupils should be taught to work independently, that is, correctly
-without the guidance of the teacher. They cannot go on forever with a
-supporting prop. It is marvelous how much they will develop if led to
-become independent. By way of assisting them, give pupils a study plan
-and a small portion of the lesson time, perhaps two minutes, during
-which time make mental note of the points neglected by the majority
-of the class. With this as a basis to work upon make the next lesson
-strong on the points in which the pupils, when working independently,
-seem the weakest. If pupils have established the correct habits a
-half-hour of practice at home or at school should not weary them. Many
-will practice longer of their own accord.
-
-_Aim_: To develop relaxation, correct posture, easy movement, and
-sufficient speed to prevent finger movement and to apply these
-fundamental principles to all penmanship lessons, spelling, copy, and
-dictation work. Grade “Failure” unless movement is used as indicated
-above. Attain a speed of seventy letters per minute in words and
-sentences.
-
-_Material_: Compendium, full size sheets of white paper, ink, blotter,
-heavy brown folios, nine by twelve inches, coarse pen, wooden
-penholder, pen-wiper, manila envelope for samples. Keep writing
-material only in these folios. Teacher should label folios with the
-name of the pupil. Monday pass to each pupil enough paper for the week.
-
-_Length of lesson_: Twenty minutes daily, five times per week. Place
-the writing period early in the day or prior to the spelling in order
-that it may function in applied work.
-
-_Distribution of time to subject matter_: During the first month spend
-half or more of the time in developing posture, movement, and movement
-drills. After the first month devote to movement drills, ovals, little
-letters and the like, one-third to one-fourth of the period; to capital
-letters, half the remaining time; to words or sentences the remainder
-of the period.
-
-_Heading_: Place on the second blue line. Write on every line except
-the first below the heading. Model:
-
- John Brown, 5 B, Sept. 15, 1924
-
-_Sample_: Take sample on the middle of each month. Memorize. Model:
-
- John Brown, 5 B, Sept. 15, 1924
- John Doe School
- City, State
- (Skip a line)
- ABCDEFGHIJKLM
- NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
- (Skip a line)
- This is a sample of my best writing
- This is a sample of my best writing
- This is a sample of my best writing
-
-
-SIXTH GRADE
-
-As classes pass from grade to grade, with each member accomplishing
-what he should according to his grade, by the time they reach the
-sixth, the correct writing habit should be firmly fixed. It is well to
-have it so, for now, more than ever before does the pupil have need of
-this energy and time saving habit. The demands for the application of
-the writing habit are daily growing more numerous.
-
-The penmanship lesson should now be devoted largely to further study
-of good letter forms, providing pupils automatically use muscular
-movement. Pupils of this age will now recognize what the former
-training means. They will now be interested because they realize that
-they have been gaining something that will be very useful to them.
-
-_Aim_: To develop relaxation, correct posture, easy movement, and
-sufficient speed to prevent finger movement and to apply fundamental
-principles to all written exercises except arithmetic. Grade “Failure”
-unless movement is used as indicated above. Attain a speed of eighty
-letters per minute in words and sentences.
-
-The material, length of lesson, distribution of time to subject
-matter, heading and samples may profitably be the same as for the fifth
-grade.
-
-
-SEVENTH GRADE
-
-In a school where each teacher has done her share of the work outlined
-according to the grade it will be observed that the quality of the
-penmanship produced by seventh grade pupils will in many cases equal
-that of adults. Adult learners, if they have in previous years used
-finger movement will have more to overcome than seventh grade pupils.
-
-It is well at all times to keep the goal in view, and gradually work
-toward it. Never permit pupils to drift. During penmanship lessons
-frequent comparisons with the models is essential. Friendly competition
-has a place. Let parallel grades of the same school or neighboring
-schools compare work. Take into consideration in the competition,
-first, legibility, then time consumed for the execution of the
-exercise, uniformity, slant, spacing, size and connecting and ending
-strokes.
-
-Many pupils no doubt do not use discretion in the selection of proper
-equipment for home work. They should realize that the right heights
-of table and chair mean much for comfort and therefore have direct
-relation to physical endurance. The use of the timepiece in order to
-keep up the right speed is an important point. Every exercise in the
-manual practiced at the right rate of speed will enable seventh grade
-pupils to acquire an average speed of fifteen to eighteen words per
-minute. Teach each pupil to be systematic in his homework as well as at
-school.
-
-In this grade it is interesting at times to allow a pupil who has
-a sense of rhythm in penmanship well developed to play the piano,
-selecting a march to which the pupils might write certain drills. The
-phonograph may be used to good advantage for the purpose of giving
-variety to the drill work. Pupils will enjoy writing the drills to the
-music. They must appreciate more fully than ever the fact that each
-school subject depends to a great extent upon others, penmanship being
-no exception. The sense of rhythm which should come from the study of
-music will often be the inspiration that will move pupils to the right
-speed when everything else fails. When pupils write to the rhythm
-produced by their own voices, such as concert counting, relaxation of
-the muscles takes place easily.
-
-It has proven very satisfactory to appoint a captain, perhaps the best
-penman in the row, to do the counting for the preliminary drills with
-which each lesson should begin. This relieves the teacher of useless
-voice work and helps to develop initiative on the part of the pupils.
-It will be necessary for pupils who do this work to count exactly
-right, first with the teacher, and later alone. They should next learn
-to count and work at the same time.
-
-Finally, pupils may well observe all the suggestions made in previous
-grades. They should, however, be able to produce much more finished
-results than in the previous grade.
-
-_Aim_: To develop relaxation, correct posture, easy movement,
-sufficient speed to prevent finger movement, and to apply these
-fundamental principles to all written exercises. Grade “Failure” unless
-movement is applied as indicated above. Attain a speed of ninety
-letters in words and sentences.
-
-_Length of lesson_: Twenty minutes daily, three to five times per week.
-The material, distribution of time to subject matter, heading and
-samples may profitably be the same as for the fifth grade.
-
-
-EIGHTH GRADE
-
-It now remains for the eighth grade teacher to receive the pupils who
-have been for the last seven years building among other useful habits
-the penmanship structure. The writing is perhaps one of the first
-subjects to be criticized or commented upon when the class is promoted.
-The evidence will be plainly for or against it.
-
-It is a common occurrence for a piano pupil after discontinuing
-practice to refuse to perform. An athlete out of practice is an awkward
-figure when getting back into form. Therefore, as penmanship is applied
-physical training it is not surprising that pupils who do not keep up
-practice to a reasonable extent soon lose skill. If the daily practice
-must be application to other subjects, and not drill work, great care
-should be exercised to make conditions favorable for the retention of
-the correct penmanship habit.
-
-It should be the privilege and duty of the pupils of this grade so far
-as possible to place all problems, etc., on the board for the teacher.
-Pupils of this age should be given every opportunity to use their good
-penmanship in any and all kinds of clerical work. They like to feel
-that they are helpful, and this spirit should be fostered. It is a
-saving of the teacher’s time and strength, and impresses pupils with
-the practical value of good writing.
-
-As these pupils pass through the junior high school, the senior high
-school, commercial colleges or universities and out into the actual
-business world, they will take on that individuality in penmanship
-which suits best. The appearance of their writing will be considerably
-modified owing to the different conditions under which each one
-performs his tasks. This is a matter of minor importance.
-
-The important question for each teacher and each pupil to answer in the
-affirmative is this: Is the writing habit acquired in the grades the
-correct one? The crown of all the efforts should be an energy and time
-saving manner of writing that will be entirely readable.
-
-_Aim_: To develop relaxation, correct posture, easy movement,
-sufficient speed to prevent finger movement and to apply these
-fundamental principles to all written exercises. Grade “Failure” unless
-movement is applied as indicated above. Attain a speed of one hundred
-letters in words and sentences.
-
-_Length of lesson_: See seventh grade.
-
-The material, distribution of time to subject matter, heading and
-samples may profitably be the same as for the three preceding grades.
-
-
-JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL
-
-When the seventh, eighth, and ninth grades are set off by themselves
-and take the name of Junior High School, conditions are somewhat
-different than when they remain a part of the grade system.
-
-The ideals of the schools differ, as they should, in some respects. A
-most striking difference is that a greater freedom in the choice of
-subjects is made possible in the junior high school.
-
-The tool subjects are wisely still obligatory and penmanship should be
-pursued until mastered sufficiently well to be a resource and not a
-liability in carrying on other subjects.
-
-_Aim_: To perfect penmanship as a tool for school work and to impress
-those who plan to enter upon business careers at the end of the ninth
-year with the fact that they should be especially serious in penmanship
-preparation.
-
-_Material_: Similar to that suggested for preceding grades.
-
-_Required subject_: Penmanship should be required through the seventh
-grade and of all eighth grade pupils who cannot meet a reasonably
-high standard previously agreed upon by the principal, supervisor, and
-teachers.
-
-_Administration of tests_: These should be given several weeks before
-the end of each semester in order to permit pupils who have not reached
-the standard set to include penmanship in their programs.
-
-Ninth grade pupils who are specializing in commercial subjects should
-have an opportunity for daily drill in penmanship in order to perfect
-their work to a higher degree. The materials, distribution of time
-to subject matter, form for headings, and samples may profitably be
-similar to that suggested for former grades.
-
-The junior high teacher does not have the same opportunity that the
-grade teacher enjoys for the observation of results unless it is so
-arranged that the penmanship teacher handles spelling also. In such
-a case by using tact, firmness and some invention this period of
-application may prove almost or quite as valuable to the acquisition of
-the correct writing habit as the time devoted to the learning of the
-drills.
-
-
-SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL
-
-Theoretically, students in the senior high school should not find
-it necessary to pursue penmanship for acquisition as a tool, but
-practically, we find many who are so unskilled in this subject that it
-is necessary to make provision for them.
-
-In any senior high school we may have pupils who have not had the
-advantages of a good foundation in the grades or in junior high. Again,
-there are those who acquire manual dexterity with great difficulty.
-Lastly, we have great numbers that are qualifying for commercial lines.
-The needs of all must be met. (Discussed more fully in Chapter One.)
-
-_Aim_: To provide every student who leaves the senior high school with
-a good working tool for business or college. No possible excuse should
-be offered in place of a good handwriting by a senior high school
-graduate who has had the opportunity to qualify.
-
-_Materials_: Similar to those in the junior high school.
-
-_Required subject_: Penmanship should be required of all who cannot
-meet a reasonably high standard agreed upon by principal, supervisor,
-and teachers. Commercial students should qualify to a much higher
-degree than others.
-
-The administrations of tests, distribution of time to subject matter,
-samples, may well be carried on in a manner similar to that suggested
-for the upper grades and junior high school.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER EIGHT SUPERVISION AND THE PENMANSHIP SUPERVISOR
-
-
-SUPERVISION IN THE PAST
-
-Supervision had its rise in the early 70’s we are told. At that time
-educators began to follow to some extent the example of the world
-of industry. Lotus D. Coffman gives us as a humorous definition of
-the function of the early supervisor the following: “The business
-of a supervisor is to cast a genial influence over the schools, but
-otherwise he is not to interfere with the work of the schools.”
-
-Supervision is evolving, and the definition of today may need to be
-revised tomorrow. At present a supervisor represents the superintendent
-in certain well defined lines. As a principal he may have charge of a
-building. He may have charge of two or more subjects in a smaller city.
-He may have charge of one subject in a city, county, or state.
-
-
-FUNCTION OF THE SUPERVISOR
-
-The first function of a supervisor is generally acknowledged to
-be improvement in classroom teaching. Let us place second the
-responsibility for a suitable course of study (in penmanship the
-selection of the text), and third, responsibility for standard methods
-whereby results may be measured.
-
-
-LEADERSHIP A PRIME QUALIFICATION
-
-Broad constructive leadership is the prime requisite for one who would
-take upon himself the arduous duties of supervisor, be it of one
-subject or of many. Each candidate should subject himself to a rigorous
-self-rating process before taking up supervision, and those in service
-should continue _to look within_. Many a situation would be saved to
-leadership and society if all who term themselves supervisors or even
-expect to some day become such would turn the white light of inspection
-upon themselves. It is not going too far to say that the prospective
-supervisor before launching himself should take unstinting pains to
-diagnose his ability as a leader.
-
-
-PERSONALITY A NECESSARY QUALIFICATION
-
-Supervisory positions are like others in that two main qualities are
-essential, namely, desirable personality and sufficient preparation.
-These essentials must be fairly well balanced in the person who is a
-candidate for a supervisory office. We are familiar with the type of
-supervisor who, though largely lacking scholastic attainments, is so
-pleasing as to give a certain desirable kind of service and who is
-therefore retained year after year. Compare such a supervisor with the
-reverse, the one who has all the professional degrees obtainable but
-who lacks the human touch. Neither type is entirely qualified.
-
-Teachers are good judges. Consult almost any teacher-made list for
-desirable qualities, and you will find that the points that make up a
-desirable personality are given preference to scholarship and other
-phases of preparation.
-
-Genuine leaders are always on the alert to improve themselves.
-When leaders are kind, constantly courteous, permit initiative,
-keep informed on current movements, exhibit tact, show industry,
-self-control, are optimistic, reliable, courageous, just, open-minded,
-progressive, sincere, tolerant; then, and then only, shall we cease to
-hear teachers speak of the worthlessness of supervision. (Perhaps poor
-supervision has been a large factor in fostering poor teaching.)
-
-Physical strength to meet the numerous demands is an essential.
-Desirable, in fact, necessary requisites are pleasing manners, such
-as poise, refinement, good speaking voice, and self possession. The
-exercise of good taste in the matter of correct and tasteful clothing
-goes far toward obtaining and holding the respect of those with whom a
-supervisor comes in contact. Dress should be simple and appropriate, of
-excellent quality, and not too striking. It has been the observation
-of the writer that supervisors, both men and women frequently use such
-excruciatingly bad taste in the matter of apparel that those who come
-in contact with them are very unfavorably impressed. It does not take a
-great deal of imagination to realize why the “celluloid collar man” and
-the “overdressed” or “home made” woman is not a welcome adjunct in the
-classroom or at neighborhood gatherings.
-
-
-BROAD PREPARATION INDISPENSABLE TO THE SUPERVISOR
-
-In the not distant past special-subject supervisors found it possible
-to qualify with no further general preparation than a high school
-diploma and a summer session or two at some higher institution. This
-is now legally impossible in many states and wisely so. A general
-college course is desirable, and particularly so since supervisors are
-apt to have occasion to direct teachers who have had such training.
-Supervisors are criticized, often justly, for being narrow and knowing
-only one subject. Older supervisors should avail themselves of the many
-opportunities for professional growth.
-
-In addition to being a graduate of high school and college a supervisor
-of a special subject should have special training and practice teaching
-along the line that he is supervising. Graduate work on the part of the
-general supervisor as the years go by is becoming almost a necessity.
-
-Travel is an essential part of education. It is not putting it too
-strongly to say that all supervisors should spend a part of nearly
-every summer in travel or at some university. Exception may be made of
-those who are called upon to contribute to some higher institution as
-instructors.
-
-Every year worthy new educational books come from the press, and many
-worth-while articles are published in educational journals. Supervisors
-who have a real message should be willing to contribute to these
-journals. By working out such articles the authors clarify their own
-ideas and inspire their fellow workers. Careful reading of educational
-journals is bound to keep special-subject supervisors aware of the
-general trend of education. Technical journals should each month find
-their way to the desk of the supervisor of special subjects.
-
-It is assumed that no person would be unwise enough to attempt any sort
-of supervision before having served a probationary term in the grades
-and if possible in high school. This gives the proper background for
-effective supervision. The best supervisors are always in a process of
-preparation and each year adds its quota of experience, rounding off
-here, burnishing up there, softening a high light of deficiency and
-blending all into a more helpful and desirable whole.
-
-
-CONTINUAL PREPARATION ESSENTIAL
-
-Let us assume that a person with such a personality and scholarship as
-was mentioned earlier in this chapter is now launched in a supervisory
-position. That person does not cease his preparation but rather
-continues it along practical lines which may include some or all of the
-features that are mentioned below.
-
-The supervisor who has a sound knowledge of educational method will be
-able to improve class room teaching and this is the primary purpose of
-supervision.
-
-The course of study is a feature that any supervisor should be
-constantly preparing to deal with, but mainly in connection with
-suggestions from the teachers who are dealing first hand with the
-children. It is the part of wisdom and justice to capitalize the
-strength of the teaching force, always giving due credit therefor.
-
-The supervisor knows how to administer standard tests, and is prepared
-to stand by the findings. He is willing to point out the need of
-special educational treatment in specific cases. He must be prepared
-to place especially talented children in their place and without fear.
-Each child should have _his_ opportunity, according to Dr. Virgil
-Dickson. This is real democracy.
-
-The penmanship supervisor should at any time be able to demonstrate
-his subject with the aid of the class for the benefit of the teacher.
-One thing is an essential, however: The supervisor must do this in
-an artistic manner, and vastly better than the teacher can do it.
-Demonstration lessons are no doubt the most popular help that can be
-rendered to teachers. Teachers like to see how some one else meets
-the classroom problem, and it is a golden time for the supervisor to
-inculcate sound educational principles and good practice.
-
-The supervisor should be prepared to administer details such as routine
-matters, to plan visiting days that are really worth while, to select
-texts, material, etc.
-
-Supervisors should not only be constantly preparing themselves for
-greater usefulness but should stand ready through courses provided
-by themselves to offer encouragement in extension work, worth-while
-meetings, and in the planning of educational exhibits. Such exhibits
-should be kept by the supervisors in order to show new teachers what
-has been attained in former years. Standards can easily be made clear
-in this fashion.
-
-
-RATING
-
-The much discussed problem of rating of teachers, first used in 1896 in
-Milwaukee, is the cause of considerable “grief” among many. We are all
-rated in one way or another, and after all why be sensitive about it? A
-good cure is a self rating card, filled in carefully, prayerfully, and
-then laid aside until next self rating day arrives. Self competition
-is bound to yield good results. Let us learn to look in the mirror
-without flinching.
-
-Whatever system is used the teacher should have a copy of the score
-card and thereby learn upon what qualities to place values. The
-score card is especially valuable for the reason just given. No
-teacher should rise or fall on the strength of one rating, or on the
-strength of the rating of one person. Boice, Elliott and Rugg have all
-contributed much in the way of score cards. Mr. Cook of South Dakota
-explains a most interesting and meritorious system in use in his state.
-
-It remains for Katherine Taylor Cranor to present the first self
-scoring card for the supervisor as an aid to efficiency in school work.
-It offers to each one upon whom the mantle of supervision has fallen
-food for thought. It must provoke any thinking person to a critical
-evaluation of himself and his work. The six main topics covered are in
-substance as follows:
-
-1. Educational, social, and personal qualifications: These include
-liberal education, tact, tolerance, poise, appearance, disposition,
-leadership, loyalty, ability to speak in public, patience, 260 points.
-
-2. Course of study: Cooperation in making it, ability to interpret it,
-140 points.
-
-3. Relationship to teachers: Wise selection, consideration of health of
-teachers, growth, self improvement, initiative, effect on their lives,
-community needs, 200 points.
-
-4. Duty toward instruction: Visiting classes, 300 points.
-
-5. Attention to details: Text books, demonstrations, routine, 50 points.
-
-6. Publicity, 50 points.
-
- _Total_, 1,000 points.
-
-
-THE BEST QUALIFIED SUPERVISOR
-
-Is it too much to say that the best qualified, the best prepared
-penmanship supervisor is the one that shares responsibility, is broad
-visioned, has both hand and heart culture, is helpful, courageous,
-and who still retains the human touch and most rapidly makes himself
-unnecessary to the teacher?
-
-
-
-
-BIBLIOGRAPHY
-
-
-_American Penman_ (Austin Norman Palmer, Editor), a monthly
-publication. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York City.
-
-Ayres, Dr. Leonard P., _A Scale for Measuring the Handwriting of
-Adults_. Division of Education, Russell Sage Foundation. New York City,
-1915.
-
-_Business Educator_, a monthly publication, Columbus, O.
-
-_Course of Study Monographs_, Elementary Schools, No. 5, Penmanship.
-Berkeley, California, 1921.
-
-_Course of Study, Syllabus in Penmanship_, as adopted by the Board of
-Education, City of New York, Park Avenue and 59th Street, New York,
-1921.
-
-_Course of Study, Handwriting_, by Administrative Department, Colorado
-Springs Public Schools, Colorado Springs, Colorado, 1921.
-
-Daugherty, Mary L., “History of the Teaching of Handwriting in
-America,” _Elementary School Journal_, December, 1917.
-
-Edson, Andrew W., Associate City Superintendent, New York, _Muscular
-Movement in Its Practical Application_. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co.,
-New York, 1910.
-
-Freeman and Daugherty, _How to Teach Handwriting_. Houghton, Mifflin
-Co., Boston, 1923.
-
-Freeman, Frank Nugent, _The Teaching of Handwriting_. Houghton, Mifflin
-Co., Boston, 1914.
-
----- “Present Day Issues in the Teaching of Handwriting,” _Elementary
-School Journal_, Sept., 1923.
-
-French, W. L., _Psychology of Handwriting_. Putnam, New York, 1914.
-
-Gray, Clarence Freeman, _A Score Card for the Measurement of
-Handwriting_. The University, Austin, Tex., 1915.
-
-Hiles, Leta Severance, and Lorenz, Marian S., _Course of Study_, Long
-Beach Public Schools, Long Beach, California, 1923.
-
-Lister, C. C., _Muscular Movement Writing, Advanced Book_. The
-Macmillan Company, New York, 1919.
-
----- _What I Saw in a Writing Class_. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New
-York, 1912.
-
----- _Writing Lessons in the Primary Grades and Teachers’ Guide to
-Writing Lessons in Primary Grades_. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New
-York, 1912.
-
-Meleney, Dr. Clarence E., Associate City Superintendent, New York City,
-_Observation on the Teaching of Penmanship in the Elementary Schools_.
-A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York, 1911.
-
-Mills, Edward Clarence, _Business Penmanship_. American Book Co., New
-York, 1916.
-
-Palmer, Austin Norman, _Palmer Method_. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co.,
-New York, 1921.
-
----- _Penmanship Pointers_, a bi-monthly magazine. A. N. Palmer
-Publishing Co., New York.
-
----- _Palmer Penmanship Budget._ A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York,
-1915.
-
-Shouse, J. B., “Obstacles to Good Handwriting,” _Elementary School
-Journal_, December, 1923.
-
-Smith, Albert J., _Applied Graphology_. The Gregg Publishing Co., New
-York, 1920.
-
-Snesrud, J. M., _Handwriting Efficiency in Junior and Senior High
-Schools_. The Gregg Publishing Co., New York, 1921.
-
-_Spencerian Authors._ Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor & Co., New York, 1874.
-
-Starch, Dr. Daniel, _Educational Measurements_. The Macmillan Company,
-New York, 1916.
-
----- _Educational Psychology_. The Macmillan Company, New York, 1919.
-
-Stryker, J. A., “Normal School Penmanship.” Paper read before the
-National Association of Penmanship Supervisors, Chicago, 1914.
-
-_The 18th Year Book of the National Society for the Study of
-Education_, Part II. Public School Publishing Co., Bloomington, Ill.,
-1919.
-
-Thompson, Mary Elizabeth, _Psychology and Pedagogy of Writing_. Warwick
-& York, Baltimore, 1911.
-
-Thompson, O. S., _Thompson’s New Penmanship, Teachers’ Manual_.
-Privately printed, Monrovia, California, 1915.
-
-Taylor, Dr. Joseph S., District Superintendent, New York City,
-_Educational Value of Muscular Movement Writing_. A. N. Palmer
-Publishing Co., New York, 1910.
-
-Zaner, C. P., _Zaner Method Manual 144_. Zaner & Bloser Publishing Co.,
-Columbus, Ohio, 1915.
-
----- _Blackboard Writing._ Zaner & Bloser Publishing Co., Columbus,
-Ohio, 1911.
-
-
-
-
-INDEX
-
-
- Accuracy, Penmanship an aid to, 32
-
- Alphabet, 76
-
- Association, Laws of, 41
-
- Athletics, Penmanship as correlated with, 15;
- Dr. Gulick’s rules, 32;
- relation to penmanship, 33
-
- Awards, 83
-
-
- Blackboard, Kind and use of, 63;
- as a teacher, 64;
- gives courage to poor writers, 65;
- points to be observed in lessons on, 65, 67
-
- Blackboard procedure for all grades, 73, 75
-
- Blotter, Use of, 70
-
- Boice, quoted, 121
-
-
- Chamberlain, Quotation, 32
-
- Clews, Henry, Statement of, 9
-
- Coffman, Lotus D., quoted, 113
-
- Colonel Parker, Quotation, 57
-
- Commercial schools, Success of, 45
-
- Commercialization of penmanship, 9
-
- Comprehensive Physical Culture, Rules for good bearing quoted from, 22
-
- Conventions, Obedience to, encouraged, 13
-
- Cook, quoted, 121
-
- Cooperation of all officials and departments necessary, 58, 59
-
- Correlation of penmanship with other subjects, 57
-
- Counting, 83
-
- Count, correct, Movement regulated by, 24
-
- Cranor, Katherine Taylor, quoted, 121
-
- Credit evaluation, 50
-
-
- Dictation, 83
-
-
- Elliott, quoted, 121
-
- Eyesight, Conservation of, 47
-
-
- Figures, 75
-
- Folders, 68
-
-
- Good writing, worth while, 11
-
- Good writing a time saver, 12
-
- Good writing, Confidence established through, 13
-
- Grade, First, 86;
- nature and difficulty of problem, 87, 88;
- aim, 88;
- material, 89;
- length of lesson, 89;
- demonstration, 89;
- distribution of time, 90;
- names, 90;
- Z group, 90
-
- Grade, Second, 91;
- conditions necessary for laying correct foundation, 91;
- results based upon use of correct habit, 92;
- board work, 92;
- posture, 92;
- aim, 93;
- material, 93;
- length of lesson, 94;
- demonstration 94;
- Z group, 94;
- distribution of time to subject matter, 94;
- headings, 94
-
- Grade, Third, 95;
- ability of, 95;
- Dr. Ayres, quoted, on legibility, 95;
- reviews, 96;
- aim, 96;
- material, 97;
- length of lesson, 97;
- distribution of time, 97;
- heading, 97;
- sample, 97, 98
-
- Grade, Fourth, 98;
- demand met by, 98;
- aim, 98;
- materials, 99;
- length of lesson, 97;
- distribution of time, 99;
- heading, 99;
- sample, 100
-
- Grade, Fifth, 100;
- independent work may be expected of, 100;
- aim, 101;
- material, 101;
- length of lesson, 101;
- distribution of time to subject matter, 102;
- heading, 102;
- sample, 102
-
- Grade, Sixth, 103;
- demand pressing in, 103;
- object clear to pupils, 103;
- aim, 103
-
- Grade, Seventh, 104;
- quality equal to that of adults, 104;
- interest continued, 104;
- home practice of, 104, 105;
- musical accompaniment, 105;
- captains in, 105, 106;
- results, 106;
- aim, 106;
- length of lesson, 106
-
- Grade, Eighth, 107;
- Practice maintained in, 107;
- practical aid of pupils in, 107;
- individuality develops in, 108;
- habits important in, 108;
- aim, 108;
- length of lesson, 108
-
- Group Plan most effective, 38
-
- Group Plan, Value of, 25;
- the working of, 26, 27, 28
-
-
- Habits, Correct maxims for, 39, 40;
- new habit may discommode, 40
-
- Habits, Correct, established by repetition, 41
-
- Habits, good, Objectives in, 77
-
- High School, Junior, 109;
- Condition in, 109;
- ideals of, 109;
- tool subjects in, 109;
- aim, 109;
- material, 109;
- required subjects, 109;
- tests, 110;
- application, 110
-
- High School, Senior, 111;
- many unskilled in, 111;
- lack of preparation, 111;
- aim, 111;
- materials, 111;
- required subject, 111;
- tests, 112
-
-
- Initial drafts, 11
-
- Ink, Kind, care of, 71
-
-
- James, on relaxation, quoted, 16
-
- James, Quotation on interest, 33
-
-
- Line Quality, 79
-
-
- McMurray, How to Study, 11
-
- McMurray, quoted, 62
-
- Manual arts, Penmanship as one, 13
-
- Mastery, Pleasure and profit in, 42
-
- Material, Economy of, 71;
- good, necessary, 47
-
- Maxwell, Henry, Study of efficiency by, 50
-
- Muscular movement a reformer, 14
-
- Muscular movement, application to general writing, 42
-
- Muscular movement conserves time and energy, 45, 46;
- conserves vision, 47;
- conserves health generally, 48
-
- Muscular movement defined, 43
-
- Muscular movement, universal method, 44
-
- Muscular movement, Utility of, 12
-
-
- Name-Cards, 75
-
-
- Paper, Economy of, 67;
- quality and ruling, 68
-
- Paper, How to move and slant, 73
-
- Parents, Influence of, 60
-
- Pencils, Kind, 68;
- Use of, by primary pupils only, 69
-
- Penholder, kind, 70
-
- Penholders, position of, 21, 22
-
- Pens, Kind, care of, 69
-
- Plan, A general, 85
-
- Poor writing a handicap, 10
-
- Position, Correct, of hand, 20-21
-
- Posture, correct, Value of, 19;
- methods of obtaining, 19-20
-
- Posture, correct, Frequency of drill on, 20
-
- Practice, Results of thoughtless, 33;
- frequency means economy, 34;
- concrete suggestions for preliminary, 34;
- content and length of period, 35, 36;
- effective leads to correct writing habit, 37
-
- Progress lesson, 77, 78
-
-
- Rating, Value of, 120, 121
-
- Relaxation a necessary condition, 16
-
- Relaxation of adults, 16
-
- Relaxation, Six methods of obtaining, 17-18
-
- Review, Value of, 30
-
-
- Samples, Object of, 80;
- procedure and standards, 81
-
- Score card, Value of, 121
-
- Segregation, Value of, 78, 79
-
- Similarity of letter forms, recognition of, 30
-
- Slant, Correct, the result of correct direction of movement, 23
-
- Standards, Two sets of, 9
-
- Study, How to, 72;
- capitals, 72;
- words and sentences, 72
-
- Supervisor, defined, The best, 122
-
- Supervisor, Function of, 114
-
- Supervisor, Leadership a prime qualification, 114;
- preparation and desirable personality necessary, 115, 116, 117;
- physical endurance and appearance, 116;
- experience an aid to, 118;
- continual preparation necessary for, 118;
- aid in improving class room instruction, 119;
- course of study and the, 119;
- value of tests recognized by, 119;
- ability to demonstrate necessary for, 119;
- attention to routine matters, 120;
- service, 120
-
- Supervisor’s visit, Preparation of teacher for, 81, 82
-
-
- Teacher, Duty of, 52;
- qualifications of, 53;
- as psychologists, 54;
- as demonstrators, 55;
- best proof of a good, 55;
- personal influence of, 56;
- as an inspiration, 56
-
- Technique necessary, 51
-
- Test, A satisfactory, 61, 62
-
- Tests, Application of standard, 76;
- endurance, 76
-
- Tests, standard, Use of, 84
-
- Theorist, defined, A, 52
-
- Time, Economy of, 48, 49;
- a computation on, 50
-
- Timepiece, Use of, 83
-
- Typewriter, Use of, 9
-
-
- Visualization, Correct, 28;
- principle of multiple impression, 29
-
- Visualization, Rules for effective, 31
-
-
- Z Group, 77
-
- * * * * *
-
-Transcriber’s Notes:
-
-Illustrations have been moved to paragraph breaks near where they are
-mentioned.
-
-Punctuation has been made consistent.
-
-Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in
-the original publication, except that obvious typographical errors have
-been corrected.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PENMANSHIP ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/66667-0.zip b/old/66667-0.zip
deleted file mode 100644
index 231dd78..0000000
--- a/old/66667-0.zip
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h.zip b/old/66667-h.zip
deleted file mode 100644
index 965ebf7..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h.zip
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/66667-h.htm b/old/66667-h/66667-h.htm
deleted file mode 100644
index b5bd728..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/66667-h.htm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4757 +0,0 @@
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
- "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
- <head>
- <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" />
- <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" />
- <title>
- Penmanship, by Leta Severance Hiles&mdash;A Project Gutenberg eBook
- </title>
- <style type="text/css">
-
-body {
- margin-left: 10%;
- margin-right: 10%;
-}
-
- h1,h2,h3 {
- text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
- clear: both;
-}
-
-p {
- margin-top: .51em;
- text-align: justify;
- margin-bottom: .49em;
-}
-
-.pminus1 {margin-top: -0.25em;}
-.p2 {margin-top: 2em;}
-.p4 {margin-top: 4em;}
-
-hr {
- width: 33%;
- margin-top: 2em;
- margin-bottom: 2em;
- margin-left: 33.5%;
- margin-right: 33.5%;
- clear: both;
-}
-
-hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;}
-hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;}
-@media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} }
-
-div.chapter {page-break-before: always;}
-.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;
- padding-top: 0;}
-
-ul.index { list-style-type: none; }
-li.ifrst { margin-top: 1em; }
-li.indx { margin-top: .5em; }
-li.isub1 {text-indent: 1em;}
-
-table {
- margin-left: auto;
- margin-right: auto;
-}
-
-/*Table of Contents format*/
-table.toc { max-width: 30em;}
-td.tocchapter{ text-align: right; vertical-align: top; padding-right: 1em;}
-td.toctitle { text-align: left; vertical-align: top; text-indent: -1.3em; padding-left: 1.3em;}
-td.toctitle1 { text-align: left; vertical-align: top; padding-top:0.5em; padding-bottom:1em;}
-td.tocpage { text-align: right; vertical-align: bottom; padding-left: 1em;}
-
-.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
- /* visibility: hidden; */
- position: absolute;
- left: 92%;
- font-size: smaller;
- text-align: right;
- font-style: normal;
- font-weight: normal;
- font-variant: normal;
-} /* page numbers */
-
-.boxitindex{
- max-width: 34em;
- padding: 1em;
- border: 0em solid black;
- margin: 0 auto; }
-
-.boxit2{
- max-width: 12em;
- padding: 0.5em;
- padding-top:0em;
- padding-bottom:0.25em;
- border: 0.15em solid black;
- margin: 0 auto; }
-
-/*Indent-padding*/
-.ir2{text-align:right; padding-right:2em}
-
-.displayinline{display:inline-block; line-height:1}
-
-.center {text-align: center;}
-
-.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
-
-.caption {font-weight: bold;}
-
-/* Images */
-
-img {
- max-width: 100%;
- height: auto;
-}
-
-img.w100 {width: 100%;}
-
-.figcenter {
- margin: auto;
- text-align: center;
- page-break-inside: avoid;
- max-width: 100%;
-}
-
-/* Transcriber's notes */
-.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA;
- color: black;
- font-size:smaller;
- padding:0.5em;
- margin-bottom:5em;
- font-family:sans-serif, serif; }
-
-/*CSS to set font sizes*/
-/*font sizes for non-header font changes*/
-.largefont{font-size: large}
-.smallfont{font-size: small}
-.cheaderfont{font-size:105%;line-height:1.75;}
-
-/*Half-title page CSS*/
-#half-title{
- page-break-before: always;
- page-break-after: always;
- text-align: center;
- font-size: x-large;
- padding: 6em 0;
-}
-
-/* Illustration classes */
-.illowp100 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp48 {width: 48%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp48 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp49 {width: 49%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp49 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp52 {width: 52%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp52 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp53 {width: 53%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp53 {width: 100%;}
- </style>
- </head>
-<body>
-
-<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Penmanship, by Leta Severance Hiles</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
-at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
-are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
-country where you are located before using this eBook.
-</div>
-
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Penmanship</p>
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:0;'>Teaching and Supervision</p>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Leta Severance Hiles</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: November 4, 2021 [eBook #66667]</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: Craig Kirkwood and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive)</div>
-
-<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PENMANSHIP ***</div>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp49" style="max-width: 40.9375em;">
- <img id="coverpage" class="w100" src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Cover." />
-</div>
-
-<p id="half-title">PENMANSHIP<br />
-<span class="largefont"><em>Teaching and<br />
-Supervision</em></span></p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp48" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/titlepage.jpg" alt="Title page." />
-</div>
-
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<h1 class="nobreak">PENMANSHIP</h1>
-
-
-<p class="center largefont"><em>Teaching and<br />
-Supervision</em></p>
-
-<p class="center p2 largefont"><span class="smallfont">BY</span><br />
-LETA SEVERANCE HILES</p>
-
-<p class="center"><em>Supervisor of Penmanship<br />
-Long Beach, California</em></p>
-
-<p class="center p4"><span class="smcap">Jesse Ray Miller</span><br />
-3474 UNIVERSITY AVENUE<br />
-LOS ANGELES
-</p>
-</div>
-
-<hr class="tb x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Copyright 1924, by Jesse Ray Miller</span></p>
-
-<p class="center p2 smallfont">FIRST PRINTING<br />
-APRIL, 1924</p>
-
-<p class="center p4"><em>Printed in the United States of America<br />
-Press of Jesse Ray Miller<br />
-Los Angeles</em></p>
-</div>
-
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<h2 class="nobreak">CONTENTS</h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<div class="center">
-<table class="toc" border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents">
-<tr><td class="toctitle" colspan="2"><span class="smallfont">CHAPTER</span></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">I</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">The Penmanship Problem</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_I">9</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>The Commercial Factor&mdash;The Educational Factor&mdash;Educational
-Value.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">II</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Fundamentals Concerned in the Problem</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_II">15</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>Physical Training Phase&mdash;Correct Posture&mdash;Correct
-Movement&mdash;Visualization of Letter Forms&mdash;Practice&mdash;Application
-of the Correct Habits to Daily
-Requirements.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">III</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">The Generally Accepted Solution: Muscular Movement</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_III">43</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>Conservation of Health a Prime Factor in the Solution&mdash;Economy
-of Time a Result of the Solution.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">IV</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Preparation of the Teacher</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_IV">51</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>The Technique of the Subject&mdash;The Ability to Secure
-Results&mdash;The Penmanship Perspective.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">V</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Suitable Equipment and Materials</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_V">61</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>Text&mdash;Blackboard and the Use of It&mdash;Paper&mdash;Folders&mdash;Pencil&mdash;Pen&mdash;Penholder&mdash;Blotter&mdash;Ink&mdash;Economy
-in the Use of Material.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">VI</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Some Workable Suggestions</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_VI">72</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>How to Study&mdash;How to Move and Slant the Paper&mdash;Blackboard
-Work of the Pupils&mdash;Name Cards&mdash;Figures&mdash;Alphabet&mdash;Endurance
-Tests&mdash;Objectives
-in Good Writing Habits&mdash;Progress Lesson&mdash;Segregation&mdash;Line
-Quality&mdash;Samples&mdash;Preparation
-for the regular Visit of the Supervisor&mdash;Counting&mdash;Use
-of the Timepiece&mdash;Awards&mdash;Use of
-Standard Penmanship Tests.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">VII</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Suggestions for the Grades, Junior and Senior High Schools</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_VII">85</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>A General Not a Specific Plan&mdash;First Grade&mdash;Second
-Grade&mdash;Third Grade&mdash;Fourth Grade&mdash;Fifth
-Grade&mdash;Sixth Grade&mdash;Seventh Grade&mdash;Eighth
-Grade&mdash;Junior High School&mdash;Senior High School.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="tocchapter">VIII</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Supervision and the Penmanship Supervisor</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Chapter_VIII">113</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td class="toctitle1"><em>Supervision in the Past&mdash;Function of the Supervisor&mdash;Leadership
-a Prime Qualification&mdash;Personality
-a Necessary Qualification&mdash;Broad Preparation Indispensable
-to the Supervisor&mdash;Continual Preparation
-Essential&mdash;Rating&mdash;The Best Qualified Supervisor.</em></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="toctitle" colspan="2"><span class="smcap">Bibliography</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#BIBLIOGRAPHY">123</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td class="toctitle" colspan="2"><span class="smcap">Index</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#INDEX">126</a></td></tr>
-</table></div>
-
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<h2 class="nobreak">INTRODUCTION</h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p>Reading, writing, and arithmetic have for long
-been looked upon as the fundamentals in education.
-And in very truth they are. Altogether too
-little attention has been given the expression of
-thought involved in the study of any school subject
-whether such expression takes the form of
-oral or written language. In fact, many failures
-in school and misunderstandings in actual life are
-due to inability to properly interpret text, read
-intelligently, or speak correctly.</p>
-
-<p>No small part of this entire problem, especially
-when applied to grade pupils, is the mechanical
-or penmanship side. Everywhere there is criticism,
-on the part of teachers and parents, of the
-quality of the pupils’ writing. In many instances
-the process is a slow and laborious one. The bodily
-positions assumed by pupils during the operation
-of writing are harmful. The effort frequently
-results in an illegible scrawl. Too often, little
-or no attention is given penmanship in the grades
-and consequently boys and girls go through life
-laboring under a serious handicap.</p>
-
-<p>In the following pages an attempt is made to
-bring definitely and concisely before educators<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[8]</span>
-the fundamental facts necessary to secure legibility
-and rapidity in penmanship, without causing
-strain of eye or cramp of hand. The treatment
-of the subject is simple and direct. The discussion
-of the problem of penmanship is followed
-by a consideration of the essentials necessary to
-the establishment of a habit that shall result in
-good penmanship. The materials necessary are
-taken up in detail. The teacher’s preparation is
-dwelt upon. Workable suggestions are given a
-place. One chapter deals with the minimum requirements
-for all and the closing chapter discusses
-supervision.</p>
-
-<p>The entire work is based upon an extended experience
-with pupils and teachers. Every suggestion
-and direction has been worked out in actual
-practice. The volume has been prepared in response
-to continued requests from teachers, principals,
-and superintendents who desire explicit
-directions that can be used to supplement any
-system of muscular movement penmanship.</p>
-
-<p>The author wishes to express her gratitude to
-the hundreds of teachers, scattered throughout
-several states in the Union, to whom she has had
-the privilege of offering instruction and from
-whom helpful suggestions have come.</p>
-
-<p class="ir2">L. S. H.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[9]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_I"><span class="smcap">Chapter One</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">THE PENMANSHIP PROBLEM</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>THE COMMERCIAL FACTOR</h3>
-
-<p>We are living in a practical age. Every institution
-of worth points to the truth of this statement.
-Of every plan advanced the query comes,
-“Will it stand a practical test?” We are constantly
-experimenting with, and adopting, new
-methods, and those in force today may be displaced
-tomorrow as being behind the spirit of the
-time. It is only natural that the commercialization
-of penmanship should take place.</p>
-
-<p>When a business man is asked what qualification
-counts most in employing clerks he is very
-apt to say, “Other things being equal, the good
-writer gets the place.” Henry Clews, the Wall
-Street banker, frankly states that the beginning
-of his successful career may be traced to good
-penmanship.</p>
-
-<p>A letter of application for a position is not
-judged by school room standards, but by business
-standards. These two sets of standards should<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[10]</span>
-be in harmony. An educator of authority finds
-that “there is little contention as to the function
-the child is to serve when he becomes part of the
-world in which he shall eventually find himself.
-Our methods as practiced however, would hardly
-be recognized as having any foundation in the
-thought for future citizenship.” Think of the
-vast army of boys and girls who leave the elementary
-school at an early age to earn a livelihood.
-These should be given the best practical equipment.</p>
-
-<p>To be sure, there are those who cite instances
-of great men whose handwriting is almost unreadable,
-and argue that point in favor of allowing
-all public school pupils to be poor writers.
-Common sense teaches us that it is unwise to burden
-ourselves with an unnecessary handicap.</p>
-
-<p>Others will say that it is not worth while, as
-every one will use a typewriter upon entering the
-commercial world. Only a certain proportion
-will enter the world of commerce, and a majority
-of those who do enter tell us that they have as
-much work to do with pen or pencil as on the
-typewriter.</p>
-
-<p>The initial drafts of the majority of all important
-documents are usually written with the pen.
-We have the word of many an author that an attempt<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[11]</span>
-to dictate the first draft results disastrously
-to the content of the manuscript. We therefore
-infer that in matters of importance the use of the
-mechanical device is not conducive to the best
-composition. The typewriter is of great convenience
-after the first draft has been revised.</p>
-
-
-<h3>THE EDUCATIONAL FACTOR</h3>
-
-<p>Again, would it not be vastly worth while, even
-for school purposes alone, to learn rapid, easy
-and legible hand-writing, since a majority of pupils
-spend nine years in the elementary and junior
-high schools? A good percentage finish high
-school and many pursue a college career for four
-years. What an asset good easy writing is in
-school and college! Every pupil owes it as a duty
-to himself and to his instructors to express himself
-legibly on paper.</p>
-
-<p>Finally, while its worth cannot be fully estimated,
-good writing is eagerly sought and its possessor
-finds it ever a ready servant and valued
-friend. We should strive for usable knowledge.
-In McMurray’s <cite>How To Study</cite> we learn that
-“It is a part of one’s work as a student, therefore,
-to plan to turn one’s knowledge to some account;
-to plan not alone to sell it for money, but to use
-it in various ways in daily life.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[12]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>EDUCATIONAL VALUE</h3>
-
-<p>Perhaps the most widely recognized educational
-value of good penmanship would come under
-the head of utility. Pleasing angles, graceful
-curves, uniformity, and clear strong lines appeal
-alike to all. From the attitude taken by many educational
-folk, relegating this subject in the curriculum
-to the background, we might think that
-they prefer illegible writing. Yet frequently these
-are the very persons who are heard to complain
-the loudest and longest over poorly written test
-papers and unreadable letters from friends.</p>
-
-<p>Muscular movement penmanship may be utilized
-to advantage in school and out. In the first
-place it saves the pupils’ time and physical energy
-in execution and the teachers’ time and energy in
-interpreting. In the second place it is most emphatically
-demanded by the world that many of
-these pupils will enter upon leaving school. Parents
-draw their conclusions, many times, regarding
-the quality of work in the school largely from
-the appearance of written work.</p>
-
-<p>Pupils who have persistently followed the drill
-until it has influenced their actual writing will
-soon realize their power: here is the evidence on
-paper, the measure of the effort put forth. They<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[13]</span>
-have conquered both mentally and physically.
-Will not the confidence established in their own
-ability be of value to them in mastering other subjects?
-What gives more pleasure, self-respect
-and encouragement to persevere than the conscious
-knowledge of skill? This consciousness of
-power and skill is a tremendous educational force
-and one that should receive constant recognition
-with reference to penmanship.</p>
-
-<p>Many are the pupils who have great difficulty
-in gaining book lore, but who find the manual
-arts attractive. To such the consciousness that
-they can do even one thing well is a powerful inducement
-toward the mastery of something less
-attractive.</p>
-
-<p>Pupils learn before they finish the elementary
-school that proper conventions must be observed
-in order to preserve social order and relations.
-When these conventions are overlooked to a great
-extent in writing, pupils are not gaining the most
-that the subject has to teach them. When irregularities
-become noticeable a check should be
-placed; otherwise the habit will become strong
-enough to be of great hindrance in later life. In no
-subject can a tendency to tear down conventions
-be discovered more easily than in penmanship
-and nowhere can we better impress upon pupils<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[14]</span>
-the desirability of obeying, to a reasonable degree,
-the conventional lines which all social beings are
-bound to recognize.</p>
-
-<p>Who cannot recall at least one “bad boy” who
-has been completely reformed by some one of the
-manual arts? Muscular movement penmanship
-has many such to its credit. Teachers and supervisors
-are called upon quite as much to reform as
-to form and inform.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[15]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_II"><span class="smcap">Chapter Two</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">FUNDAMENTALS CONCERNED IN THE PROBLEM</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3 id="CHAPTER_IIB">THE PHYSICAL TRAINING PHASE</h3>
-
-<p>Pupils who are apt at athletics will easily recognize
-the purpose of muscular movement penmanship.
-They will draw upon former experiences
-in the field or gymnasium and compare the
-value of relaxation, good posture, rhythm, and
-continuity of movement. They will recognize that
-the same laws of control govern Indian club
-swinging, field sports, and penmanship. They
-will appreciate the fact that to obtain good results
-with the pen they must follow with military
-precision the directions of the leader. Interest
-will be doubled when pupils really find themselves.
-Many pupils obey the laws of correlation
-naturally, and through their athletics they gain
-control of the muscular adjustment that operates
-in the process of writing.</p>
-
-<p>Adult learners of muscular movement frequently
-have more difficulty in relaxing completely<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[16]</span>
-than do younger pupils. Often with
-adults the habit of bodily relaxation has not been
-developed along with other habits, and therefore
-muscular tension prevails. A leading criticism on
-Americans is that we never relax.</p>
-
-<p>James says: “It is your relaxed and easy worker
-who is in no hurry and quite thoughtless most
-of the while of consequences who is your efficient
-worker; and tension and anxiety, present and future,
-all mixed up together in our mind at once,
-are the surest drags upon steady progress.”</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp52" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i017.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">At Attention</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<hr class="tb x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp53" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i019.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">Relaxation</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<hr class="tb x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp52" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i021.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">Ready to Assume Correct Position of
-Arms, Hands, Pen and Paper</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<p>The mind must be concentrated upon the relaxation
-of the muscles in order to get the best
-results. As writing is feeling passed through
-thought and fixed in form, it is very important in
-writing that the mind help make the muscles to
-make movements, just as it helps them to relax.
-By putting the muscles in a workable condition
-at the beginning of each lesson, great improvement
-in muscular response will be observed.
-Muscular relaxation must be considered seriously
-if we would make real progress in muscular training.
-We all know how cramped and tremulous
-the letters are when they are written by a hand
-that is under nervous tension. The nerves must
-be at ease, the pen must rest lightly in the hand
-in order to obtain the best results. Teachers<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[17]</span>
-who have not the ability to relax themselves, cannot
-hope to lead the class to do so. The tone of
-voice used in giving directions, whether musical
-or strident, has to do with inducing relaxation.
-The following plan has proven of value in the
-class room:</p>
-
-<p>1. Pupils sit erect in seats, stretch arms out
-even with the shoulders, feet on the floor, heads
-erect, while the teacher counts softly to ten, with
-the pupils; at ten, drop the arms to the sides. Repeat
-six times. A practiced eye will soon see
-whose arms are tense. Ask pupils to become as
-limber as they would in skating, jumping, dancing,
-horseback riding or swimming.</p>
-
-<p>2. Pupils sit erect in seats, bend forward from
-the hips, raise arms over the desk, and six inches
-from the desk, make a square turn at the elbow,
-count ten slowly, drop the arms on the desk; repeat
-six times.</p>
-
-<p>3. Pupils sit erect, bend from the hips, both
-elbows on the lower corners of the desk, relax,
-dropping the forearm on the desk; repeat six
-times.</p>
-
-<p>4. Retaining position in paragraph 3 let pupils
-roll the muscle below the elbow in a circular manner
-to a soft musical count, from one to ten. Eyes
-should be first directed toward the arm, then<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[18]</span>
-away from it, toward the ceiling. By following
-the last suggestion, it is observed that pupils relax
-unconsciously. All of this drill will be of no value
-unless pupils are able to retain a relaxed condition
-of the muscles while the writing instrument
-is in use. Let them take the handle end of the
-pen, and prepare for this circular motion before
-making it.</p>
-
-<p>5. It will be necessary for the teacher to spend
-a few minutes at the beginning of every lesson
-with one or more relaxing exercises during the
-first months of each school year, and later if
-found necessary. It is advisable to break the
-lesson with relaxation exercises if it is observed
-that pupils are becoming keyed-up through effort.</p>
-
-<p>6. Rhythm and regularity of movement are
-essential. Pupils’ counting aloud relieves the tension.
-It may be necessary to lay the pens down
-once or twice, for a few seconds each time, during
-the lesson. Ability to control the writing arm
-comes in proportion to our ability to relax the
-controlling muscles. Control in the matter of
-penmanship is a vital educational factor. Says a
-well known authority: “Could the school teach
-effectively the lesson of self control, we need have
-little fear of the results when the product of the
-system is thrown upon the currents of the world.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[19]</span>
-What is the most important attribute of man as
-a moral being? May we not answer, the faculty
-of self control? This it is which forms a chief
-distinction between the human being and the
-brute.”</p>
-
-
-<h3 id="CHAPTER_IIA">CORRECT POSTURE</h3>
-
-<p>Correct posture while writing is an essential;
-first, from the standpoint of health, and again,
-that we may have free play of the writing muscles.
-Proper seating has an important place here. The
-desk should be sufficiently high from the seat, so
-that, when a pupil is seated and with both arms
-on the desk, the shoulders should not be raised.
-If the desk is too low, pupils will bend in the
-shoulders instead of from the hips and the chest
-will be compressed and the spine contorted.</p>
-
-<p>No doubt many cases of spinal trouble are a direct
-result of improper seating and unhealthful
-posture during school hours. Pupils frequently
-bend the neck and strain the nerves and muscles
-uselessly. The hint, “Heads up” is often a sufficient
-reminder and will serve to correct this ungraceful
-and harmful habit. By sitting almost
-square in front of the desk, circulation is not impeded
-in any way and relaxation will result more<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[20]</span>
-easily. The body supports itself, and must not
-touch the desk. The eyes should be fourteen
-inches from the paper. In order to be comfortable,
-the feet must touch the floor. It is within
-the province of the manual training department
-to provide wooden footstools of simple construction
-for the small pupils who must sit at large
-desks.</p>
-
-<p>With the feet on the floor, body erect, ready to
-bend from the hips, chest high, arms hanging at
-the sides in a relaxed manner, we are ready for
-the next step. By placing the elbows at, or near
-the lower corner of the desk, raising forearms,
-then relaxing and dropping to the desk, the pupils
-are impressed with the idea that they must keep
-the cushionlike muscle on the desk. The elbows
-may extend beyond the edge of the desk, perhaps
-an inch, if this adds to the comfort of the writer.
-There should be a right angle turn at the elbow.</p>
-
-<p>Drill on correct posture should be given frequently
-until acquired, several times during a
-lesson, in fact, while learning. Too many liberties
-with these rules will cause trouble later when
-the next step is to be accomplished.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp52" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i027.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">Ready for Work</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<p>With the forearms on the desk, close the right
-hand; open and close several times; with the
-right hand half open, the tips and nails of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[21]</span>
-third and little fingers touch the desk. The
-knuckles of the thumb and three fingers should
-be in sight. Every joint is bent a trifle in correct
-position of the hand. The two points of contact
-then are a large portion of the under forearm and
-the tops and nails of the third and little fingers.
-The wrist should be kept straight and free from
-the paper. The side of the hand must not touch
-the paper. Slip a card under the side of the hand
-to test this point. The muscles that hold the third
-and little finger in correct positions need to
-be strengthened. Pupils are apt to straighten the
-fingers and bring about a tension or go to the
-other extreme and curl the third and little fingers
-into the palm of the hand and glide on the
-knuckle joints. Both positions strain the ligaments
-and bear away from, instead of toward,
-good control. It is most important that a beginner
-should watch the position of the hand. Other
-mistakes may be rectified gradually, but correct
-position of the hand must be established at once.</p>
-
-<p>The penholder is held by the thumb and first
-and second finger, touching the second finger near
-the root of the nail. The first finger joints are
-bent slightly. The first finger rests on the penholder
-at least an inch from the point of the pen.
-The thumb joint is also bent. The penholder may<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[22]</span>
-cross above or below the knuckle joint of the first
-finger. The penholder should point half way between
-the shoulder and the elbow. Keep the penpoint
-on the paper squarely, wearing both nibs
-equally.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp52" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i031.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">Ready for Action</span></p>
-
-<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Ready for Penholding</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<p>In <cite>Comprehensive Physical Culture</cite>, we find
-this valuable suggestion: “In sitting it is necessary
-to hold the chest up; to guard against bending
-forward at the waist line, for this contracts
-the chest, cramps the lungs and stomach, and
-often produces dyspepsia. In sitting, if one
-wishes to bend, the movement should be from the
-hips, but never from the waist; the knees should
-never be crossed, for this position, besides being
-inelegant and ungraceful, often leads to paralysis
-by diverting the blood from the leg through pressure.
-The one rule to be observed by the woman
-who seeks to be healthy and graceful is to keep
-the chest active; it should never be relaxed; holding
-this part of the body constantly erect gives
-real poise to the carriage and strength to the
-muscles. A fine bearing is of great advantage, for
-it has a significance which people intuitively recognize
-and respect; the person who comes before
-us chest raised and head erect inspires confidence.
-Other things being equal, the person who
-elevates the chest constantly is more self-respecting
-than the one who habitually depresses it.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[23]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>CORRECT MOVEMENT</h3>
-
-<p>Pupils must be taught that a line is the product
-of the motion used; “that the motion preceding
-the contact of the pen to the paper must
-be in the direction of the line to be made, and that
-some letters being more complex than others, less
-speed should be used.” For example, the straight
-stroke exercise is essential as a beginning step in
-movement application because it not only
-stretches the muscles, but correctly done it teaches
-direction. Movement that prepares for the
-straight stroke exercise is best obtained by taking
-correct position and pushing the first finger to
-and from the center of the chest with the third
-and fourth finger nails gliding on the desk and
-forming a movable rest. The wrist must be kept
-free at this time, and the forearm moves on the
-cushionlike muscle below the elbow. We base
-the direction or slant of down strokes in letters
-later upon this straight stroke exercise. If the
-ovals, the next exercise in order, take an incorrect
-slant at any time, return to the practice of the
-straight strokes as a corrective means toward the
-proper slant.</p>
-
-<p>Pupils must know that the direction of movement
-is one of the chief essentials, and that before<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[24]</span>
-they can possess ability to produce properly
-proportioned forms they must develop their
-movement in the proper direction. They must
-be led to understand that the mere free and easy
-action of the arm in any direction is not necessarily
-a movement that can be used in writing.</p>
-
-<p>To insure against too slow a movement it will
-be necessary to use some measure for time.
-Counting is a good means of regulating the movement;
-it keeps the class working enthusiastically
-together, and gives an idea of how fast to practice.
-One count should be given for each down stroke.
-The count, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10; 1, 2, 3,
-4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 30, etc.,
-to one hundred is advised for straight strokes and
-ovals. All pupils counting in concert with the
-teacher at the rate of about two hundred down
-strokes per minute is effective, as the oral count
-relieves the muscular tension that is apt to prevail
-at this time. Insist that every arm move
-from the shoulder and that each pupil feel correct
-movement and observe his own arm. It is
-advisable to use the watch, and time pupils daily
-on a part of all drill work. If the count be too
-rapid, nervous spasmodic movements will result;
-if too slow, the fingers or wrist joint will be apt
-to act, and finger movement will be the result. A<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[25]</span>
-steady rhythmic beat is essential, to tone down
-the speed of the nervous and erratic and inspire
-the slow ones into more rapid response.</p>
-
-<p>There is a subtle influence in the sprightly musical
-count as well as in the conversational count,
-such as “round, round, round,” or “light, light,
-light,” to induce proper width to a narrow oval,
-or lightness to a heavy line. A mistake that is
-fatal to early progress is frequently made by allowing
-pupils to take the pen in hand to write
-before automatic movement is gained. Much
-drill on relaxation and study of the writing machine
-and attention to rhythm work at the correct
-speed is necessary at the beginning of each lesson,
-to make for automatism. Sufficient speed to discourage
-finger and induce muscular movement
-must be insisted upon at all times.</p>
-
-<p>At this point it will be observed that pupils
-vary in regard to their ability in the use of free
-movement. The group plan meets this difficulty
-very successfully. Some allowance must be made
-for new pupils, those habitually irregular, and for
-the slow pupils in rooms where children have not
-been segregated for ability.</p>
-
-<p>When all is done that can be done by the class
-plan to make pupils understand relaxation, posture,
-and motive power, we find that there will<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[26]</span>
-still be some who have not made sufficient progress
-to advance. The important question is,
-when are these pupils going to have an opportunity
-to learn? How can encouragement be offered
-to those who have done well, and at the
-same time continue repetition of what is necessary
-with those who have accomplished but little?</p>
-
-<p>The group plan is advised by many successful
-teachers. Assign pupils who have done well and
-who can practice in the right way to seats at the
-left of the room (“A” group) as the teacher faces
-the class, it being understood that those who
-prove themselves unworthy of being in the “A”
-group will have a place in the “B” group. After
-the segregation is complete and the plan under
-way it will be well to keep a check on the “A”
-group; some pupils forget quickly when left to
-themselves, while it develops independence and
-pride in others. The “B” group will occupy the
-rows to the right of the teacher as she faces the
-pupils, and by stepping to the extreme right side
-for the survey every hand may be seen while at
-work. The members of the “B” group understand
-that they are there because they need special
-help, and will be promoted as soon as they
-learn the lessons already mastered by the “A”
-group. At the beginning of every lesson a careful<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[27]</span>
-but brief review will be necessary of the points
-that the “B” group is expected to learn. The entire
-class should give attention at this time.</p>
-
-<p>The “B” group is still preparing with the handle
-end of the pen while the “A” group will be
-actually making lines. Economy of time should
-be studied, or the period will be wasted; both
-groups must be kept busy all the time. The same
-count will answer for both divisions. Occasionally
-it will be well to give the “A” group a certain
-amount of work to accomplish and to note if it
-is done within the right time limit. They are to
-compare carefully with their models and also to
-work for improvement in the product without
-special instruction. The “B” group will not make
-so many exercises but their posture and movement
-will be growing stronger every lesson. In
-order that they may not become discouraged, it
-is well to let them make some of the exercises
-each day but the greater part of the time should
-be given over to rapid changes of relaxation, posture
-and movement until these essentials are
-thoroughly ingrained. The “B” group will be
-greatly helped by working at the board, to the
-same count that the “A” group uses at the seats.
-Once during the lesson allow the “B” group to
-rest and watch the “A” group work. The pupils<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[28]</span>
-in the “B” group will not cover as much subject
-matter as will the “A” since it is composed of the
-new pupils and those who have the greatest difficulties.
-No pupil should be promoted to the “A”
-group until he assumes correct posture in all
-written work and can make ovals, straight strokes
-and short words with correct movement. He
-must prove his ability as an independent worker
-and show reasonably good results in order to be
-considered an “A” pupil.</p>
-
-
-<h3>VISUALIZATION OF LETTER FORMS</h3>
-
-<p>It has been said, “The three arts of education
-are seeing, reading, thinking. The boy who
-learns to see is awakened; the boy who learns to
-read is enriched; the boy who learns to think is
-emancipated.” Why does not an artist always
-make a desirable and pleasing picture? Perhaps
-it is because he does not see the subject correctly
-or to advantage, or perhaps he has not mastered
-all the mechanical difficulties. It is for the teacher
-to decide whether all has been done that can
-be done to assist the pupils to see the model letter
-form correctly. Perhaps there exist mechanical
-difficulties in posture and movement that
-prevent a free execution of the letter form that
-may exist in the mind.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[29]</span></p>
-
-<p>Pupils should understand that they are to educate
-the head and hand together. Concentration
-on correct forms goes hand in hand with practice.
-Some pupils have greater aptitude than others
-toward perception of form; it is certain that
-the hand will not learn to reproduce constantly
-a form that has not been fully and entirely idealized
-by the mind. It has been discovered that human
-beings vary greatly in the completeness, definiteness,
-and extent of their visual images. Pupils
-should be impressed through as many sense
-channels as possible. Some learn through explanations,
-others through demonstrations at the
-board, still others by working at the board themselves.
-Out of this variety of impressions each
-pupil will find the one that is most lasting for
-himself. Every penmanship teacher should recognize
-this principle of multiple impression.</p>
-
-<p>Mental pictures are what we mean when we
-speak of “noticing” things. We think we are noticing
-all sorts of things during our waking hours;
-as a matter of fact, we recognize fewer things than
-we suppose. Ask a pupil to describe any familiar
-object and prove this statement. If you
-point out the various characteristics he will
-quickly see them, and will be likely in future
-trials to see them; but if left to himself he would<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[30]</span>
-need a great deal of time to become familiar with
-the main features. Frequent review of model
-letter forms is necessary, for it keeps our minds
-fresh and helps to reveal new and hitherto unthought-of
-aspects. Each view well considered,
-then put aside, freshens us for the next one. We
-are thus led to make trials and discover relations
-which otherwise would remain hidden. Many
-pupils, for the most part unsuccessful, never get
-so far as that. Many who fail believe that they
-have seen all there is to see, take up something
-else, or do nothing.</p>
-
-<p>Pupils may be led to observe the forms of letters
-and their common characteristics through
-variations of common principles. To illustrate:
-many letters are modifications of the oval exercise,
-near or remote. In almost every writing system
-on the market we have four, the O, A, C, and
-E. Modifications of the straight stroke are more
-numerous still; then we have letters that show a
-combination and modification of the two exercises.
-Pupils should be able to see and describe
-just which stroke gives slant and character to the
-letter. There is a striking analogy in the beginning,
-ending, and width of many of our letters.</p>
-
-<p>Very rarely is the image the exact reproduction
-of the percept; it differs in distinctness, outline,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[31]</span>
-detail, and sometimes even in most important
-qualities. Look at the model letter, close the
-eyes, you will still see the form. Retentive and
-reproductive powers are at work, while the image
-is in process of formation. Form perception, and
-other mental pictures than what we are striving
-for, are present and act upon and modify present
-percepts.</p>
-
-<p>Let the room be quiet, so quiet that there is
-nothing to distract. Require the pupils to lay
-their heads on the desks, shut their eyes, and rest,
-not for long, for fear of day dreams. Without allowing
-them to awake from their playsleep, picture
-in brief vivid statements, without repetition,
-or unnecessary detail, the parts of a letter. Raise
-the heads, open the eyes, take pens and ask pupils
-to reproduce a picture of the letter just described.</p>
-
-<p>In effective visualization certain conditions
-must be fulfilled. In the first place the exposure
-must have lasted for a sufficient length of time,
-very much as is required in photography. We
-can gain no mental picture of things where the
-exposure is too brief.</p>
-
-<p>A careful study of letter forms must engender
-the habit of observation and knowledge of the
-difference between accuracy and vagueness. Since
-penmanship is one of the manual arts it will<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[32]</span>
-be executed definitely right or definitely wrong.
-Chamberlain on the value of manual training
-says: “The more accurate the work in hand, the
-less likely is doubt and uncertainty to play a part.
-In grammar and history a mistake upon the pupil’s
-part may easily pass unchallenged. The student
-glides over an error unconsciously or without
-intent; and even the teacher may not detect
-the fault. In a word both the teacher and pupil
-are likely to be deceived. In the shop or in the
-cooking room it is quite different. Be the box
-too short, the metal too thick or too thin, the
-joint too loose, the basket askew, the stitches uneven,
-or the ingredients improper in proportion,
-little doubt need enter the pupil’s mind as to the
-rightness of his work.”</p>
-
-
-<h3>PRACTICE</h3>
-
-<p>A few years ago Dr. Gulick laid down the following
-hints on training for the boys in their athletic
-work in New York City:</p>
-
-<p>1. Always warm up slowly and cool off gradually
-when finished.</p>
-
-<p>2. Stop practice when you are exhausted.</p>
-
-<p>3. Dress lightly for practice or competition.</p>
-
-<p>4. Practice regularly, a little each day if possible.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[33]</span></p>
-
-<p>5. Have regular hours for eating and sleeping.</p>
-
-<p>6. Don’t smoke.</p>
-
-<p>To a person who has the correct perspective on
-the penmanship habit the application of the hints
-enumerated will seem quite reasonable. To train
-in any line, one must practice. Repetition is
-necessary, and the time element essential, as it
-takes many efforts to accomplish the desired end,
-good penmanship. The muscles to be trained are
-large, and the conventional forms are small.</p>
-
-<p>With a little forethought and planning the
-practice period may be varied, live and interesting.
-Everyone must learn, sooner or later, that
-much discipline may be gained by keeping steadily
-at work not interesting in itself. James says:
-“We have of late been learning much of the philosophy
-of tenderness in education; ‘interest’ must
-be assiduously awakened in everything, difficulties
-must be smoothed away. Soft pedagogics
-have taken the place of the old steep and rocky
-paths to learning. But from this lukewarm air
-the bracing oxygen of effort is left out. It is nonsense
-to suppose that every step in education can
-be interesting.”</p>
-
-<p>Thoughtless practice might much better be left
-undone. There is no use in trying to excuse careless
-work to oneself with the thought, “I won’t<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[34]</span>
-count this time.” Each careless stroke is being
-registered though we do not count it; for nothing
-we ever do, strictly speaking, is ever wholly
-blotted out. Paths frequently and recently trodden
-are those that lie most open, and those which
-may be expected most easily to lead to results.</p>
-
-<p>The first practice may be difficult, for the nervous
-and muscular systems have a new lesson to
-learn. The second and third trials will be easier,
-for the body has begun to recognize what lies before
-it. The following attempts will steadily become
-easier. A path means economy in traveling.
-The muscle should work with a fatalistic
-steadiness; if so, the result must necessarily be
-work done in a clean and finished manner.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp100" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i045.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">Ready for Drill</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<p>To be concrete, let us presuppose a thirty
-minute practice period in muscular movement
-penmanship, under fairly favorable conditions.
-The desk should be adjusted for physical comfort.
-The light should come from the left side. Loose
-sheets of good quality paper eight by ten and one-half
-inches in size, with three-eighths inch spacing
-should be furnished. At least two sheets should
-be placed under the one being used, that the penpoint
-may be saved extra wear. A fluid ink that
-flows freely is best. A coarse, flexible pen, blotter,
-and ink-wiper complete the list of supplies. It<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[35]</span>
-is assumed that the adopted manual containing
-instructions and model letter forms is always on
-the desk for reference during the practice period.</p>
-
-<p>Our first aim should be to get the mind and
-muscle into action. To this end at least two
-hundred two-space straight strokes or the same
-number of ovals should be made in one minute.
-Secondly, this will assist in the form building of
-the letter to be mastered, which let us assume is
-the capital O. A light smooth line will be obtained
-by limiting the amount of ink. Make at
-least two hundred strokes with one dip of ink.
-Correct speed will be best obtained by requiring
-the time limit in all drill work. Correct slant
-should develop as a result of the correct teaching
-of the straight stroke exercise.</p>
-
-<p>Having done this preliminary drill we are now
-ready to consider the second point of the lesson,
-namely, the making of the letter O. The first
-consideration is the general form. By comparison
-with the model we find a striking analogy in
-width and slant, to the form of the oval. The
-ending stroke and the points that characterize
-the letter must be observed, and lastly, the size
-is to be noted. Close the eyes a moment and see
-if the image is fixed. Prepare to write by using
-the handle end of the penholder until the right<span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[36]</span>
-rhythm has been established by counting one, two,
-for the first O; three, four, for the second O; five,
-six, for the third O; seven, eight, for the fourth
-O; nine, ten, for the fifth letter of the group. Five
-“make believe” letters is the result of this count;
-we can easily make three groups of five each,
-across the page. Time consumed will be one
-minute for sixty to seventy-five letters. When
-the muscular adjustment is perfected through
-this preparatory motion, then, and then, only,
-are the pupils ready to write. Write and compare
-with the model, time and again. If the letter
-has been visualized correctly, each child will
-be able to criticize his own work effectively. Glaring
-errors should be pointed out first and remedied.
-Work on this letter might occupy the main
-portion of the writing lesson for many days before
-passing to another letter form.</p>
-
-<p>Any class that has been drilled correctly on
-the ovals, straight strokes and capital O should be
-able to apply the movement acquired to a short
-word and this perhaps forms the most important
-part of the lesson. For example take “Omen,”
-spelling the letters aloud, capital O-m-e-n. Words
-so dictated should be executed by junior high
-school pupils and adults at the rate of at least
-fifteen to eighteen per minute. This will prevent<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[37]</span>
-any possibility of a return to finger movement at
-this time. Dictation of letters is quite effective
-with slow pupils. The application of movement
-to a word, at the close of each lesson, will lead the
-pupils quite unconsciously into a better movement
-of all written work. Here they get the help
-along the lines necessary to steady and modify the
-movement, and a chance to get into the swing of
-actual writing without too much thought as regards
-the content. Such drill serves the same
-purpose in penmanship that scale practice does
-in music. The writing of words at the close of
-each lesson serves as the connecting link between
-the theoretical drill work and practical writing.
-Such daily drill work as just suggested at the
-close of the writing lesson will effectually eliminate
-the sharp line of demarcation between the
-drills and “real writing.” In a short time a list
-of words will be the result, and these with others
-may be combined into sentences. The supplementary
-words given should incorporate all the
-small letters of the alphabet; the one-space letters
-first, thirteen in all, then the loops above the
-line, <em>b</em>, <em>f</em>, <em>h</em>, <em>k</em>, and <em>l</em>; loops below the line, <em>g</em>, <em>j</em>, <em>y</em>,
-and <em>z</em>; and lastly, those irregular in height, <em>p</em>, <em>t</em>, <em>q</em>,
-and <em>d</em>. A fair allotment of time for the above
-suggestive plan would be five to ten minutes on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[38]</span>
-ovals and strokes; ten to fifteen minutes on the
-letter O; and five to ten minutes on the word-practice.</p>
-
-<p>The group plan seems to be the only logical
-method of reaching all pupils with the instruction
-necessary to their peculiar needs. The advanced
-group will be learning to act independently, while
-the other will be learning basic principles.
-Friendly criticism and rivalry should be fostered,
-by comparing the method by which results were
-obtained. Let one group watch the other work.
-Let the group watching count for the other and
-change about. Generally, the entire class work,
-if any, should be posted, unless it be known that
-a certain page is posted because of its special
-merit. Pupils should be taught at the outset that
-team work in a drill subject is what counts and
-should take proper pride in good work as a class.
-Every class will produce a few good writers. In
-many schools a new lesson is not taken up before
-seventy-five per cent of the pupils have accomplished
-the preceding lesson well according to
-standards previously agreed upon. It is often
-impossible for all members of a class to attain
-perfection in penmanship. We do not demand
-that in other subjects.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[39]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>APPLICATION OF THE CORRECT HABITS
-TO DAILY REQUIREMENTS</h3>
-
-<p>The muscular movement writing habit should
-become automatic when pupils have developed
-enough skill through exercises to apply the movement
-consistently to all written work. The best
-skilled teachers might give a lesson daily in any
-grade, but unless the principles inculcated during
-that lesson are followed conscientiously during
-the remaining periods of the day the gain will be
-slight. If time is allotted for practice the result
-is surely worth applying to all written exercises.
-The Committee of Fifteen appointed to investigate
-the coordination of studies in primary and
-grammar grades propounded the question, “Has
-penmanship distinct pedagogical value?” The
-following is one of the best answers: “Penmanship
-as an art is but pen drawing, as a factor in
-education it should be taught more frequently in
-connection with other studies. Both penmanship
-and drawing suffer much from their isolated position
-in the school course. We therefore need to
-teach writing while teaching other subjects and
-the reverse.”</p>
-
-<p>In grounding the movement application habit
-we may well follow these maxims:</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[40]</span></p>
-
-<p>First, focalize the attention of the pupils on the
-habit to be acquired. Teach definitely relaxation,
-posture, movement, and visualization.</p>
-
-<p>Maxim number two tells us to suffer no exception
-to occur until the new habit is firmly rooted
-in our lives.</p>
-
-<p>Number three calls for frequent repetition. We
-must therefore give daily drill on the points that
-go to make up the correct writing habit.</p>
-
-<p>Fourthly, “Don’t preach too much.” Lie in
-wait for the practical opportunities, and get the
-pupils at once both to think and to act. Such opportunities
-are never lacking, since so many lessons
-are conducted through the medium of the
-pen.</p>
-
-<p>Lastly, keep the faculty of personal effort alive
-by a little gratuitous exercise every day. After a
-high degree of perfection has been reached it is
-maintained only by the follow-up system of daily
-effort directed toward the retention of the habit.</p>
-
-<p>The habit of movement application demands
-vigorous and continued effort; the exertion may
-possibly be so great that the pupil is temporarily
-more discommoded than by his former habit. If
-the wise course is pursued the old disability will
-vanish, a new path will be made in the brain,
-and application of movement will be established.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[41]</span></p>
-
-<p>The main problem with every teacher is how
-to assist pupils in linking up the principles that
-have been mastered, namely, correct posture, and
-movement applied to drills and short words with
-the practical writing. The drill on short words
-will prove as valuable as any other part of this
-theory work. By the laws of association, pupils
-will connect the muscular sensation of the short,
-rapidly written word, with what is required when
-a variety of longer words or sentences is dictated.</p>
-
-<p>At the beginning of every lesson in which writing
-is used as a vehicle for thought, attention to
-the correct habit will be the means of setting
-many pupils right, and of increasing from week
-to week the number of those who do all writing
-with muscular movement. Finally, all incorrect
-movement will be eliminated, and we may then
-return to visualization. A proper balance must
-be preserved in regard to seeing and doing, or our
-results will be one sided. When a pupil “finds”
-himself with reference to the application of movement
-problem, attention may be almost equally
-divided between retention of that movement and
-form building. By the time form is established
-movement will be second nature, and with a little
-continuous practice will never be lost.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[42]</span></p>
-
-<p>It is time to require all written work to be done
-with muscular movement when pupils can make
-good two-space ovals, four hundred across an
-eight inch page, and straight strokes in the same
-manner; have visualized one capital letter and
-can make it at the right speed per minute, for
-example, sixty to eighty O’s per minute; and can
-write short words such as “men” and “mine” with
-correct movement, in correct posture, and within
-the correct space limit. An easy way to begin
-is to require application to the subjects where the
-mind is least concerned as to the content, for example,
-the spelling lesson.</p>
-
-<p>If pupils have been taught to turn the searchlight
-of investigation on their own habits they
-will be entirely conscious of the feeling of mastery
-that takes possession when muscular movement
-becomes automatic.</p>
-
-<p>Those who have not thus succeeded should
-look well into the basic principles of relaxation,
-correct posture, and movement, especially as applied
-to letters and short words. Study the hand
-and arm in its preparatory motion while working
-at the correct speed. Care should be exercised
-that there be no movements of the joints of the
-wrist, thumb or fingers. Alternate the preparatory
-motion with writing until the sensation of
-mastery prevails.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[43]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_III"><span class="smcap">Chapter Three</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">THE GENERALLY ACCEPTED SOLUTION: MUSCULAR MOVEMENT</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>CONSERVATION OF HEALTH A PRIME FACTOR IN
-THE SOLUTION</h3>
-
-<p>Truly, necessity is the mother of invention.
-At the dawn of the present commercial age, the
-finger movement and even the slightly improved
-combined movement were forced to give way to
-some method more rapidly executed. Whole
-arm movement also proved inadequate. The
-method that has made the commercialization of
-penmanship possible is that of muscular movement.
-By this method only are the fingers relieved
-from furnishing the power which should
-rightly come from the large muscles of the arm.
-Muscular movement, as applied to writing, is a
-rotary motion with the large muscles of the forearm
-for a center while the fingers, though not
-held rigid, are not permitted any movement of
-their own. This movement takes place from the
-shoulder, the pivotal point, with the weight of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[44]</span>
-the arm resting on the desk. Muscular movement
-method does not emphasize prescribed
-forms so much as proper method of execution.</p>
-
-<p>It is no special wonder that the leading educators
-of the day are now investigating penmanship.
-Changing from the slant to vertical, and
-now again to the slant, what is the average teacher
-to conclude? What shall she teach indeed if
-she is convinced at all regarding any system of
-penmanship, or is qualified to teach any method?</p>
-
-<p>The person who makes practical use of penmanship,
-the one who uses it to help him earn his
-daily bread, points the way. It matters not if
-he calls it muscular movement or if he ever saw
-a penmanship teacher. Watch such a person and
-observe his method. Observation will reveal that
-practically all use what we term a muscular
-movement slant method. It takes the practical
-person only a short time to discover the method
-that will best conserve energy, economize time,
-and, above all, lead to writing which will prove
-readable and attractive. It is a method of such
-character as fulfills all necessary requirements
-and thus proves the useful tool.</p>
-
-<p>Because we are a practical people, the public
-is now looking forward to results from the formal
-writing lesson. Teachers should expect the same<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[45]</span>
-degree of excellence to come from penmanship
-instruction as from correct teaching of mathematics,
-history, reading, or any other subject in
-the curriculum.</p>
-
-<p>It has been remarked many times that commercial
-schools and business men have put the
-stamp of approval upon the muscular-movement-slant
-method rather than upon any other. The
-reason is obvious. In fact, commercial schools
-have been the missing link between the oft-times
-theoretical public school and the actual business
-world. Commercial schools have found it possible
-during their short course of six or eight
-months to give our elementary school pupils an
-asset that the public schools have failed to bestow
-in as many years.</p>
-
-<p>With the present day crowded curriculum it
-has been found necessary to adopt some method
-by which the time consumed in the preparation
-of the written lessons might be shortened. Again
-muscular movement slant method came to the
-rescue, this time to the elementary school pupils.</p>
-
-<p>There is a certain amount of energy available
-in the nervous system. Discreet use of this energy
-is a lesson dearly bought by many. The automatic
-writing habit conserves energy and prevents
-diffusion of effort. In writing one’s<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[46]</span>
-thoughts, the mind should be occupied only in
-rendering the thought into correct English. To
-be truly useful the art of writing must finally be
-done with the muscles and not with brain energy.
-That we may save any draught on the intellectual
-power we should be entirely unconscious of the
-execution of the forms.</p>
-
-<p>Men are constantly at work in the business
-world devising schemes whereby energy and time
-may be economized. Cannot the schools do their
-share in this great scheme for the betterment of
-humanity? We should teach pupils an energy-saving
-manner of expressing themselves upon
-paper. How much useless nerve force is applied
-daily by pupils of all ages in forcing the pen along
-with the fingers in such a way that it is only less
-painful to the observer than to the performer?
-Why not try to assist in ending this useless waste
-of energy in the school world by directing a reasonable
-amount of energy into the correct channel?
-How much of our energy is misdirected
-daily when we should be making it our ally? We
-should fund and capitalize all energy, and at last
-live at ease upon the interest. The more details
-we can hand over to automatism, the more our
-higher powers of mind will be set free for greater
-work.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[47]</span></p>
-
-<p>Children are the nation’s most valuable asset.
-Vision is the first faculty in order of importance.
-How can it be best conserved? A proper regard
-for the future usefulness of the eyes of the pupils
-requires that a departure be made from the method
-now prevalent of demanding so much written
-work. A keen observer who realizes the true nature
-of a child will postpone the requirement of
-written language and fine print reading until a
-time when the more delicate eye muscles are
-properly developed and able to stand the strain.
-Muscular movement writing makes conservation
-of vision possible because it demands first, last
-and always, correct posture and proper lighting.</p>
-
-<p>Nearsight is frequently brought on by straining
-the eyes to see objects, and especially small
-blackboard writing, at a distance. Light shining
-on the board causes a glare, and when pupils are
-sitting so that the work on the board is seen at a
-trying angle the result is harmful to the eye. All
-work placed on the board during a penmanship
-demonstration, or at any other time, should be
-executed large enough and with lines so bold
-that pupils in the rear of the room may see it
-plainly without eye strain.</p>
-
-<p>Correct posture while writing precludes a
-tendency toward curvature of the spine, and also<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[48]</span>
-saves the eyes unnecessary strain. Numberless
-people sit and write more hours than they walk or
-ride. Who would presume to question the value
-of correct posture while walking, in its relation
-to good health? We are painfully inconsistent,
-when the writing habit is in operation, with regard
-to many of the laws that make for good
-health.</p>
-
-<p>Only as we work toward the saving of energy
-for ourselves and others are we keeping step with
-the progressives who are teaching conservation
-from the kitchen to forestry. Surely our aim
-should be the greatest accomplishment with the
-least expenditure of energy.</p>
-
-
-<h3>ECONOMY OF TIME A RESULT OF THE SOLUTION</h3>
-
-<p>Second only in importance to conserving the
-health by economizing energy through muscular
-movement is the time saving element. People
-who would recoil from ordinary thieving are often
-guilty of dishonesty of a kind that is closely akin
-thereto. We joke over our own poor handwriting
-and moan over that of our friends, yet we
-would be greatly startled were we actually to
-compute the number of priceless hours wasted
-every day by busy people trying to decipher illegible<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[49]</span>
-writing. Not only time but temper as well
-is destroyed. Quite as painful, only less annoying,
-to the economist of time is the accurately
-drawn script that we know consumed fully three
-times as much time as should have been required
-for its execution.</p>
-
-<p>In many schools we find that the method of executing
-written lessons is not equal to the need.
-Then also, we have pupils taking several times
-as long as should be required for written spelling
-or composition. Muscular movement will reduce
-several fold the time necessary for all written
-work and the benefits will not end there, for better
-quality in the content will result. The pupil
-will be left free to dictate and the hand will obey
-quite unconsciously.</p>
-
-<p>We constantly hear the plea, “We cannot teach
-writing; we have not the time.” Would it not
-be well to make some computations at this point?
-Compare a class or school that uses a good muscular
-movement, acquired through a formal writing
-lesson of from twenty to thirty minutes daily,
-with a class in which penmanship is hit or miss.
-The latter irregular habit always results in an irregular
-slant and finger movement. Judge then
-if it would not be well to teach pupils to save
-time. We carefully consider how to minimize<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[50]</span>
-waste of energy in a machine. Is the human machine
-of less importance?</p>
-
-<p>Since penmanship is used largely as a vehicle
-for expression to convey the mental product to
-others, is it not reasonable that we employ the
-easiest and speediest method of transportation?
-It is convenient to be master of a method that can
-record thought as fast as the mind shapes it. The
-right method will aid thought, not impede it.</p>
-
-<p>Henry Maxwell, as a workman, began to study
-the length of time he required to each part of a
-job. He kept a record and studied it. He then
-busied himself seeing where he could cut down
-all unnecessary strokes. He found that on a certain
-six hour job all but two hours and forty-seven
-minutes were consumed by bad planning, poor
-tools, and needless movements. Maxwell, as a
-master craftsman, is one of the all too rare people
-who are setting things in order. Everything
-can be provided more easily as a result of the
-work of a man like him. He opens up the possibility
-of leisure through the saving of labor.</p>
-
-<p>Assuming that not more than five or ten minutes
-were saved by the pupil during each written
-lesson, think of the total saving per day, per week,
-per month, not to mention the saving of time to
-that same man or woman when his school life is
-over and school of real life begins.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[51]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_IV"><span class="smcap">Chapter Four</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">PREPARATION OF THE TEACHER</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>THE TECHNIQUE OF THE SUBJECT</h3>
-
-<p>To fit oneself from year to year for the ever
-increasingly difficult task of teaching is a serious
-problem. We are to some extent compensated in
-a material way; our chief payment, however, is
-in the consciousness that through newly acquired
-knowledge our methods are improved, and the
-reflection is mirrored in the quality of our work.
-That methods presuppose a knowledge of the subject
-matter, is necessarily as true in the science of
-muscular movement penmanship as in other subjects
-less homely and less practical. The indispensable
-accompaniment is inspiring instruction
-suited to the inculcation of the proper habit on
-the part of the class. Too often we forget that
-anything that is worth possessing is paid for in
-strokes of daily effort. By neglecting the necessary
-concrete labor, by sparing ourselves the
-daily effort, we are standing in the way of obtaining
-the desired final results.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[52]</span></p>
-
-<p>All will agree that results speak. Shall we not
-then be repaid for our trouble when pupils mirror
-the reflection of our labor? Having personally
-mastered the difficulties of the subject, the
-teacher and supervisors are aware of the pitfalls
-which await the pupils. Only then do we cease
-to be theorists and become capable of demonstrating
-the truth of our methods. Uniformly good
-results may be obtained in almost any class if
-proper instructions are followed. If we are not
-obtaining good results in the product our methods
-are at fault. Could a teacher without knowledge
-of reading or of numbers devise suitable methods
-for presenting reading or numbers? Surely, the
-teacher cannot teach that which he does not
-know, be the subject penmanship or astronomy.
-Neither is the ambitious teacher content with a
-partial knowledge of any subject. Unless intensive
-knowledge of a subject obtains, no teacher
-will be able to follow successfully second hand
-methods.</p>
-
-<p>It is significant that the Normal Schools require
-their graduates to qualify in the useful art
-of practical penmanship. Many teachers have
-found that the correspondence method is well
-suited to and fulfills their needs for a complete
-penmanship training. Universities now offer<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[53]</span>
-summer courses in penmanship. Supervisors frequently
-give weekly drill classes for unqualified
-teachers upon which attendance is obligatory or
-optional. It is the regret of many of our best
-teachers who have been in the service for some
-years that they did not have opportunity or were
-not required to qualify in penmanship earlier in
-their educational career. Unless an inexperienced
-teacher knows how to teach intuitively,
-ludicrous blunders will be made. If knowledge
-be lacking regarding any branch, the quality of
-the young teacher’s work will be still less desirable.
-The everlasting <em>how</em> will confront the
-teacher every day, and each time it will be necessary
-to find an answer.</p>
-
-<p>It is unfortunate for our schools that so many
-teachers feel that they can succeed in teaching
-penmanship without themselves knowing how to
-write. To know only the first few principles will
-not be sufficient, though they are not to be underestimated.
-To complete the structure we must
-build upon the firm foundation of first principles
-a crude but proper framework. When this is
-firmly reinforced, we put on the finishing touches.
-Many do not get further than the foundation;
-others stop at the next important stage, the crude
-product; while others who are persevering work<span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[54]</span>
-to the end and have the satisfaction of enjoying
-the beautiful structure complete.</p>
-
-
-<h3>THE ABILITY TO SECURE RESULTS</h3>
-
-<p>There are few successful teachers who are not
-good psychologists and who therefore do not
-know the process by which growth is secured.
-Knowledge is the cornerstone of the foundation.
-However it is not enough that we know the subject
-which we are to teach; we must have the ability
-to impart knowledge that the self-activity of
-the pupils may induce growth.</p>
-
-<p>All teachers are not endowed alike with this
-wonderful gift. It is also a truism that to realize
-one’s shortcomings in this direction is the first
-step. If the pupils are not interested, and response
-cannot be obtained, let us look for the direct
-cause in the teacher and for the indirect cause
-in the supervisor. The far seeing teacher will
-aim to surround the penmanship lesson with the
-proper atmosphere at the outset. As pupils are
-more interested in seeing what is done than by
-abstract explanation, a few skillful and telling
-strokes at the desk or on the blackboard will
-serve as a much greater inspiration than for the
-pupils to come into the room and sit before a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[55]</span>
-model that has been executed while they were out
-of sight.</p>
-
-<p>Skillful questioning and holding the entire
-class for answers is of great advantage when visualizing
-letter forms, and again when criticising
-and comparing results. The laws of cause and
-effect operate in penmanship as surely as they
-operate elsewhere. What is the cause of incorrect
-slant, a heavy stroke or a careless form?
-Pupils who know how to think may be put on
-the right road by being taught to criticize their
-own work.</p>
-
-<p>It is one thing to impart the knowledge one
-may possess of correct execution; the obtaining
-of results is quite another. Many a teacher has
-been greatly discouraged when a view of the results
-was obtained because close observation revealed
-that pupils had not comprehended the idea
-which the teacher intended to convey. Let us
-adopt new methods or modify old ones until desirable
-results are obtained. The pupils are
-placed under our care that they may have an opportunity
-to gain some of the knowledge and skill
-of which we, as teachers, are supposed to be in
-possession.</p>
-
-<p>The best proof that the imparting has been
-clear, logical, and effective is in the quality of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[56]</span>
-results so easily observed in the penmanship class.
-Every lesson is a new record of what has already
-been grasped by the pupils or a presentation of
-something new, or better still, a combination of
-both. Enthusiasm is one of the most essential
-points to be gained by the class. It must actually
-be experienced before it can be imparted to the
-pupil. If it is not felt by the teacher the next
-duty is to induce it by look and act.</p>
-
-<p>The unconscious influence of the teacher cannot
-be measured. With pupils, teachers are more
-than ideals; they are realities. The personal influence
-is more lasting than the particular system
-that is taught. A competent teacher must be the
-master of the situation. Little inspiration can
-be created by the timid teacher. Originality, individuality,
-attractive personality, courage, confidence,
-ease of manner, firmness, tact, initiative&mdash;these
-are desirable assets for the penmanship
-leader. Such a leader has a ready following.</p>
-
-<p>A penmanship teacher must balance enthusiasm
-with tact, system, and resourcefulness, and be
-ever on the alert to discover the individual needs.
-Tact plays a very important part in penmanship
-instruction for by the exercise of it we are led to
-say and do the right thing at the right time.</p>
-
-<p>True, we get no more out of this subject than<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[57]</span>
-we put into it. Let us be more pedagogical in imparting
-this subject. Let us outline a penmanship
-lesson as carefully as we would other lessons.
-The result will justify the labor.</p>
-
-
-<h3>THE PENMANSHIP PERSPECTIVE</h3>
-
-<p>Penmanship is entirely too isolated, and the
-value of cooperation and correlation are not sufficiently
-recognized. Young America demonstrated
-this perfectly when at the beginning of a
-written spelling test he asked if he should write
-it with muscular movement or with his “real
-writin’.” To him the drill that was supposed to
-make for the correct writing habit had not taken
-hold. He failed to associate the practice method
-with practical work. Again, great tact must be
-exercised in the attempt to correlate the penmanship
-with other subjects, lest in an unguarded
-moment a teacher may tire the pupils and thus
-defeat the much sought-for end.</p>
-
-<p>Colonel Parker says: “The present trend of
-study, investigation, and discovery in the science
-of education is toward the correlation and unification
-of educative subjects and their concentration
-upon human development. All subjects,
-means and modes of study are concentrated under<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[58]</span>
-this doctrine upon the economization of educative
-effort.”</p>
-
-<p>Persistence on the part of the teacher is absolutely
-essential, for pupils will forget and must be
-constantly reminded. If on all occasions the
-teacher of English or other subjects will bring a
-due amount of pressure to bear upon the class
-during all written recitations and take the proper
-share of responsibility, good results will be rapidly
-noted. On the other hand, we should have
-scant respect for the penmanship teacher who habitually
-uses poor English and who is not pedagogical
-in the presentation of the subject.</p>
-
-<p>Since it is common to evaluate subjects in
-terms of credits, would not a system of daily
-credits in writing tend to dignify the subject?
-Would not this react upon the pupil in a desirable
-way? As the matter now stands in many
-schools no credit is given to encourage; only complaints
-are heard when the work is not up to
-standard.</p>
-
-<p>We do know that all pupils who enter the commercial
-department of our public schools soon
-take it for granted that penmanship is a part of
-their stock in trade. The laws of necessity are
-plainly followed. These pupils have credits for
-penmanship.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[59]</span></p>
-
-<p>In the requirements for good penmanship, consistency
-should be shown from the lowest to the
-highest. The closest cooperation from the superintendent
-down to the first grade teacher is urged.
-Set a standard, and bring the pupils up to it, as
-is done in other subjects. One grade teacher may
-teach well, another poorly or indifferently, and
-thus the pupils are passed along. The school system
-where this prevails may be compared to a
-chain with now and then a weak link. Unless
-there is unity and cooperation among teachers
-the subject suffers greatly. The right kind of supervision
-is helpful, but it cannot accomplish all
-things. Not infrequently we hear the remark,
-“I am not the penmanship teacher; Miss So-and-so
-teaches all the penmanship.” Our “second
-speech” is too important a matter to be left to
-one person unaided. Upon whose shoulders shall
-be placed the responsibility? If a school does remarkably
-excellent or noticeably poor work in
-any subject, whose is the reward or the blame?</p>
-
-<p>The proper attitude of the Superintendent and
-the principal will go far to popularize any subject,
-penmanship no less than any other. This attitude
-will be reflected unconsciously upon the
-teacher, and the pupils will be quick to take the
-cue.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[60]</span></p>
-
-<p>How often is the muscular movement writing
-supervisor told by the boys in particular, “My
-father writes that way.” The right attitude is
-established immediately because the boy sees the
-relation of the school to a practical need. In fact,
-parental influence is a factor to be reckoned with
-in penmanship and the thoughtful teacher will
-do well to inquire into the attitude of the parents
-toward this useful art. Many times it means leverage
-for the teacher. In case the pupil is old
-enough to realize a motive for improving, the influence
-of the teacher alone may be sufficient. On
-the other hand, the boy frequently decides to follow
-the occupation or trade of his father, without
-regard to capacity or aptitude. Vocational guidance
-is essential.</p>
-
-<p>In the consideration of this subject, by parents,
-superintendents, principals, and teachers, let us
-not forget that we are living in a rapidly changing
-age, that we should ever be on the alert to study
-the present day needs, and that an open mind is
-essential to progress.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[61]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_V"><span class="smcap">Chapter Five</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">SUITABLE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>TEXT</h3>
-
-<p>When the conclusion has been reached that
-some muscular movement system should be followed
-in order to inculcate the best writing habit,
-it still remains to select the text. Great care
-should be taken in this. A satisfactory text should
-abound in instructions to be read until fully understood,
-and illustrated with a sufficient number
-of models to answer all purposes of visualization.
-The text should be of convenient size; the drills
-and cuts should be arranged in a logical manner.
-The instructions should be in such simple language
-that all pupils can comprehend them. A
-manual with model forms only for the lower
-grades would prove very helpful, the teacher supplying
-the instruction. First grade pupils should
-write on the blackboard, but only from correct
-models placed there by the teacher in the presence
-of the pupils. Many primary grade educators<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[62]</span>
-favor no writing in the first grade except
-such as is taught from the board.</p>
-
-<p>She would be far more than an ordinary teacher
-who could give a class of pupils (without the
-help of a text) the pictures in her own mind in a
-sufficiently clear and vivid manner to result in
-correctly executed work on the part of the pupil.
-Surely all reasonable aids should be given pupils
-in their efforts to learn penmanship. A good text
-is as much needed in this as in any other subject.
-We should laugh at the idea of teaching arithmetic
-or English without the aid of the text; yet
-many good school people seem to think writing
-can be absorbed in some mysterious manner from
-more or less indefinite word pictures and a few
-blackboard copies done in a more or less skillful
-manner.</p>
-
-<p>Again we hear of schools that arrogate unto
-themselves the right to change the author’s plan,
-or to accept it in part, frequently omitting the
-most important and vital points. There is no
-unity and no consistency in this manner of doing
-things. McMurray’s question and answer along
-this line is pertinent when he says, “What should
-be the attitude of the young student toward the
-authorities that he studies?” The answer is,
-“Certainly, authors are, as a rule, more mature<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[63]</span>
-and far better informed upon the subjects that
-they discuss than he, otherwise he would not be
-pursuing them.”</p>
-
-
-<h3>BLACKBOARD AND THE USE OF IT</h3>
-
-<p>Much may be said for and against the use of
-the blackboard. At best, it cannot supplant the
-use of the text. To begin with, the blackboard
-models are liable to be executed hurriedly and
-therefore poorly; and again these models, however
-correct, are not seen by all at the same angle.
-A slate or glass board is to be preferred. This
-should be placed low enough for all pupils to
-reach easily. All wall space, including that between
-the windows, should be utilized for blackboard.
-When pupils are copying writing from the
-board the window shades should be adjusted in
-such a manner that the pupils’ eyes do not suffer
-from the glare.</p>
-
-<p>Good blackboard writing on the part of the
-teacher points its own moral. The teacher has
-less teaching to do. Pupils imitate almost every
-school room procedure from the teacher’s dress
-and mannerisms to her writing. Fortunately it
-is much easier to write well upon the blackboard
-than upon paper and no possible excuse can be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[64]</span>
-offered that will cover poor board writing on the
-part of either teacher or pupil.</p>
-
-<p>Good work on the board serves as an attraction
-to the subject since the pupils are always interested
-in seeing the creation of a skillful hand. It
-is also indispensable in studying the construction
-of letters and the teacher who can execute freely
-and rapidly at the board possesses a most valuable
-asset. When proper visualization has taken
-place, that is, when the mental photograph has
-been acquired by exposing the lens of the eye sufficiently
-long, it is well to erase the model or constructive
-lines and refer to the models in the text,
-since these are what the pupil will aim to approach.
-All work placed upon the board should
-be in exact harmony with the system in use at
-the writing hour, since example is more than precept
-and pupils gain unconsciously by seeing the
-correct forms before them.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp100" style="max-width: 40.625em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/i077.jpg" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><p class="center"><span class="smcap">Blackboard Position</span></p></div>
-</div>
-
-<p>Just as we have pictures that exert a correct
-moral influence hung in the rooms and halls, and
-mottoes containing beautiful sentiments ever before
-us, so should we place the correct written
-forms before the pupil. Again, note the effect of
-regular written work done in an incorrect manner!
-Pupils will be very apt to draw the conclusion
-that the models used during the writing lesson<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[65]</span>
-and real work are two different matters. Frequently
-the grade teacher will apologize to the
-supervisor for the appearance of the copy. This
-does not raise her in the estimation of her class,
-but rather calls their attention to her short-comings.
-By spending a few minutes daily for a
-month any teacher may develop such excellent
-blackboard work that no apologies should be
-necessary.</p>
-
-<p>Pupils who are discouraged in penmanship will
-find that good results may be obtained very easily
-at the board. They must be taught at the outset,
-however, that the movement at the board and
-that required at the seat is quite different. Form,
-rhythm, and slant should be developed first at the
-board, as these three points <em>are</em> in common. By
-listening to the teacher’s criticism of blackboard
-results, pupils will easily become more critical of
-their own work.</p>
-
-<p>Points to be observed in a blackboard lesson:</p>
-
-<p>1. The teacher should be able to make for each
-pupil a correct copy in the presence of the class.</p>
-
-<p>2. Pupils should stand with the left side turned
-slightly toward the board to insure slant writing,
-and prepare to write as high as the eyes. Make
-movement for the exercises in the air yet almost
-touching the copy first, in order to gain correct
-size and spacing.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[66]</span></p>
-
-<p>3. All pupils should write to the teacher’s
-count or dictation. Require much concert work
-at the board. Keep the lips closed and thus avoid
-breathing dust from the crayon. Hold the crayon
-between the thumb, and first and second fingers,
-allowing the end not in contact with the
-board to extend toward the center of the palm.</p>
-
-<p>4. Straight strokes and ovals on correct slant
-will serve as a basis upon which to build all letters
-and words. Pupils should step along with
-the work as it is executed on the board, and thus
-keep correct alignment.</p>
-
-<p>5. Pupils should be taught to do board work
-carefully, whether it be a writing exercise or regular
-work. Develop all difficult new drills at the
-board first. Suppose the class numbers forty; allow
-twenty to pass to the board for a ten minute
-period, if twenty minutes is the time allotted for
-a writing lesson. The groups at the seats should
-be taught to do the counting for or with the teacher,
-also to be alert for all errors in posture, slant
-and form.</p>
-
-<p>6. It is very important that the line should be
-made strong enough that it may be seen easily
-from the rear of the room without eye strain. The
-writing should be large enough to be seen easily
-from any point in the room.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[67]</span></p>
-
-<p>7. When erasing use a downward stroke. Lift
-the eraser on the upward stroke. This allows the
-dust to drop in the trough; a good signal is,
-“Erase,” “Lift,” “Erase,” “Lift,” or “Down,”
-“Lift,” “Down,” “Lift.”</p>
-
-
-<h3>PAPER</h3>
-
-<p>“A workman is known by his tools.” It is as
-essential that good material be supplied for the
-penmanship as that any other department be well
-supplied as regards quality and quantity. Not
-only should good paper, pencils, pens and ink be
-used during the formal lessons each day, but in
-every lesson wherein writing is used to carry on
-the other work. Permit no scribbling, utilize every
-line, keep paper in neat folders; thus economize
-in the right manner, and not by the purchase
-of poor equipment, which is an irritation to
-teacher and pupil alike. The difference in cost
-of good and poor material is slight when compared
-with the results.</p>
-
-<p>Paper should be of such quality that the pen
-will not pick up the fiber and cause blots. The
-proper ruling for penmanship paper is three-eighths
-of an inch (26 points). Size of letters
-and space between letters will be more easily developed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[68]</span>
-by the use of the ruling suggested than
-by the use of unruled paper. Only in upper grades
-where good work obtains should an attempt be
-made to use unruled paper for the writing lesson.
-Size of sheets for lower grades should be not more
-than six by eight inches. Upper grades may use
-a sheet eight by ten and one-half inches. Writing
-on thick tablets should not be permitted. Use
-loose sheets of paper, always having the top sheet
-padded by one or two extra ones beneath to save
-wearing the penpoint needlessly.</p>
-
-
-<h3>FOLDERS</h3>
-
-<p>Each pupil should have a heavy paper folder
-in which to keep all writing material. The use
-of such a folder saves much time in the passing
-of material.</p>
-
-
-<h3>PENCILS</h3>
-
-<p>If pencils are used in the first or second grade
-they should be large, and cylindrical in form
-(never octagonal), and of medium soft lead. The
-writing period should not be taken up with the
-sharpening of pencils. Erasers should not be allowed.
-Lead pencils are not at best conducive<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[69]</span>
-to movement beyond the ovals and strokes. The
-use of the cheap tablet, the bane of the teacher’s
-life, and the poor quality lead pencil do much to
-hinder application of the correct writing habit in
-the lower grades.</p>
-
-
-<h3>PENS</h3>
-
-<p>A coarse, flexible pen (never a fountain or a
-stub pen) should be used by all teachers of muscular
-movement writing. Pens are dipped in oil
-before being boxed; for that reason when taking
-a new pen it is best to dampen it and remove the
-oil. Many a blot will be saved by so doing. Dip
-in the ink until the hole in the pen is partly or
-entirely filled with ink. When touching to the
-paper, be sure that both nibs come in contact, and
-are made to wear evenly. Each pupil should have
-his own pencil or pen, for sanitary reasons, as
-well as because no two persons wear a pen in exactly
-the same manner. After the lesson is ended
-the pen should be wiped on a penwiper. Removing
-the ink, which contains acid, will cause
-the pen to last longer, and a clean pen will do
-better work than one clogged with sediment. Pupils
-should never drop the pen to the bottom of
-the inkwell in order to get ink; this ruins the penpoint<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[70]</span>
-and causes unnecessary noise. A good
-penpoint should last from eight to fourteen hours
-or longer if properly treated. Inkwells should be
-filled frequently.</p>
-
-
-<h3>PENHOLDER</h3>
-
-<p>A penholder of wood, or one tipped with cork,
-is preferred. No learner should be permitted to
-use a metal tipped penholder. On account of the
-pressure that must be exerted in order to keep the
-metal penholder from slipping, proper relaxation
-of the hand cannot take place. Frequently
-the metal rusts or is so heavy that the penholder
-is a burden to the inexperienced.</p>
-
-
-<h3>BLOTTER</h3>
-
-<p>Each child should be provided with a blotter.
-It is well to let the ink dry as the pen spreads it
-on the paper except in case of a blot. Many pupils
-have the habit of taking the blotter in the
-hand and of giving the page a series of slaps with
-it, in quick succession; instead of taking up the
-ink this merely blurs the page. The correct way
-is to place the blotter on the line, give it an even
-pressure, and lift it, never moving it while the
-pressure is being applied.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[71]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>INK</h3>
-
-<p>Use the best fluid ink obtainable. Ink made
-from crystals or powder is less satisfactory. It
-should be dark blue or black and flow freely.
-Bottles and inkwells should be kept closed when
-not in use. If the air is excluded the ink does not
-thicken. Occasionally water may be added, but
-great care must be taken in reducing ink that it
-be not made too thin.</p>
-
-
-<h3>ECONOMY IN THE USE OF MATERIAL</h3>
-
-<p>School boards and officials are generally willing
-to procure good supplies if economy is practiced
-in the use of them. For the sake of uniformity,
-and that every child may have an equal
-chance, it is advisable for the school to furnish all
-material for writing. Pupils frequently do not
-use proper discrimination in their purchases,
-when the matter of supplies is left to them.</p>
-
-<p>Lastly, it is a mistake to think that good results
-can be obtained with poor material. In
-building any structure that we hope to last a lifetime
-we are careful to supply ourselves with the
-best of material. This principle applies in rearing
-the penmanship structure.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[72]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_VI"><span class="smcap">Chapter Six</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">SOME WORKABLE SUGGESTIONS</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>HOW TO STUDY</h3>
-
-<p>Observe the board demonstration. Trace text
-correctly: Capitals twelve times, words six times
-and sentences three times, at correct speed. Write
-at correct speed one-half minute, one minute, or
-two minutes as required. Compare with models.
-Test and grade.</p>
-
-<p>How to study capital letters: Height, three-fourths
-space high; slant, same as strokes; width,
-wider or narrower than single ovals; beginning
-stroke, how and where; end stroke, how and
-where; speed of letter studied; name a variety of
-counts and select the most pleasing; analogy to
-other letters; name as many points as can be observed
-that are peculiar to the letter under discussion.</p>
-
-<p>How to study words and sentences: Slant must
-be the same as strokes; letters must be of uniform
-height; space between letters uniform and equal
-to an oval of the same relative size as the small<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[73]</span>
-letter; end strokes curve upward; beginning
-strokes start under end of strokes of previous
-word; study especially the most difficult letter.</p>
-
-
-<h3>HOW TO MOVE AND SLANT THE PAPER</h3>
-
-<p>Check each line for capitals into thirds, place
-four or five letters in a third; move paper to the
-left about two inches at each check mark, at the
-same time say aloud, “Move.” At the end of the
-line say, “New line.” This should be the invariable
-rule during the concert count. This makes
-for uniformity of slant; it gives the class a chance
-to help, and relieves the teacher. In making four
-hundred ovals, say “Move,” at each quarter.
-Slant the paper so that the line written upon runs
-from corner to corner of the desk.</p>
-
-<p>Second grade: Check in middle, and move
-paper once only. Second and third grades make
-two hundred ovals and strokes per line.</p>
-
-
-<h3>BLACKBOARD WORK OF THE PUPILS</h3>
-
-<p>(Explained in detail in <a href="#Chapter_V">Chapter Five</a>.) Pupils
-affected: first and second grades especially. On
-Monday all poor writers in any grade work at the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[74]</span>
-board and perfect the new letters or sentence for
-the week. Suggested procedure for any grade:</p>
-
-<p>Place a model (two in lower grades) for each
-pupil.</p>
-
-<p>Demonstrate briefly the letter.</p>
-
-<p>Class face board, trace with right forefinger,
-teacher and class counting.</p>
-
-<p>Trace with chalk, six or more times. Erase.</p>
-
-<p>Make drill to count.</p>
-
-<p>Class criticize and answer questions.</p>
-
-<p>Introduce simple test lines to prove to class
-that work measures up to standard.</p>
-
-<p>Personal help.</p>
-
-<p>Upper grade pupils should not spend more than
-one-half to two-thirds of the period at the board,
-then they should go directly to seats and make the
-good forms just learned function on paper. In all
-applied work at the board, hold pupils equally
-as responsible for correct forms and neat legible
-writing as in seat writing.</p>
-
-<p>Position at the board: Turn the left side slightly
-toward the board, allow left hand to hang or to
-hold the eraser. Write as high as the eyes. Use
-signal, “Stand erect,” “Turn,” “Face,” “Down”;
-the last signal to be given when the teacher desires
-to see all the work at the board.</p>
-
-<p>Good line quality is largely the result of working<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[75]</span>
-at correct speed throughout the drill period,
-for by so doing even pressure is exerted, and
-pleasing quality is the result.</p>
-
-<p>The eraser should be drawn downward from
-the top line to the groove, holding it parallel with
-the groove. This permits the chalk dust to fall
-where it should. Lift the eraser and repeat, always
-drawing from the top line downward.</p>
-
-
-<h3>NAME CARDS</h3>
-
-<p>By the fifth week of school, name cards should
-be provided for each pupil. Paste at the ends in
-front or back of the compendium. (Pasted in
-this way they may be easily removed.) Trace
-names daily at the seats.</p>
-
-<p>First grade children trace names daily at the
-board until they can be legibly written.</p>
-
-
-<h3>FIGURES</h3>
-
-<p>Figures are to be practiced daily by making
-from one to two lines of the date. Figures are
-one-half space high in the first four grades, one-third
-space high in the remaining grades.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[76]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>ALPHABET</h3>
-
-<p>The alphabet should have a place on the board
-in each room by the end of the first week of
-school. It will prove very convenient if the speed
-for each letter is placed near in small figures.
-New and unqualified teachers may ask the supervisor
-to place the alphabet on the board the first
-term.</p>
-
-
-<h3>ENDURANCE TESTS</h3>
-
-<p>Pupils should be taught to compare their work
-frequently with the standard penmanship chart,
-a copy of which should be on the wall of each
-room. In this way they are able to rate themselves
-for quality. Before the end of the first
-term pupils should be able to endure a dictation
-of words or sentences for one minute, at the proper
-speed, with ease and in good posture and with
-fairly good forms. The seventh month should
-find them able to take a two minute endurance
-test with greater ease and better forms.</p>
-
-
-<h3>THE “Z” GROUP</h3>
-
-<p>The Z group in first and second grades should
-receive proper consideration. Above the 2 B it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[77]</span>
-has been demonstrated that the Z classes, so far
-as writing is concerned, are not far behind others
-in their work. When necessary, cut the content,
-lower the speed, repeat more often your instructions,
-count more, and expect less perfection in
-form.</p>
-
-
-<h3>OBJECTIVES IN GOOD WRITING HABITS</h3>
-
-<p><em>Good posture</em>: health, appearance, efficiency.</p>
-
-<p><em>Speed</em>: For accuracy and efficiency, both practical
-needs.</p>
-
-<p><em>Spacing</em>: To relieve the eye, and make easy
-reading.</p>
-
-<p><em>Slant</em>: To make writing attractive and easy to
-read.</p>
-
-<p><em>Neatness</em>: To further a civic need.</p>
-
-<p><em>Tracing</em>: To visualize and thereby assist in acquiring
-correct form.</p>
-
-<p><em>Movement drills</em>: Ovals for curves, strokes for
-slant, small letters for traveling movement.</p>
-
-
-<h3>PROGRESS LESSON</h3>
-
-<p><em>Time</em>: Friday or the last lesson of the week.</p>
-
-<p><em>Conditions</em>: Class must know how to study.
-Class must work fairly well independently. Class
-must have had all drills demonstrated.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[78]</span></p>
-
-<p><em>Method</em>: Place problems on the board, numbered,
-not less than two nor more than four, unless
-the class is very efficient. Each pupil starts
-with No. 1. Teacher passes down aisle, gives a
-progress check if work is satisfactory, if not, a
-criticism. (A rubber stamp marked “Improving”
-is very effective.) If checked, pupil takes next
-drill; if not he practices the same drill until the
-teacher comes again. In a fifteen minute period
-the teacher can check up the room at least three
-times. Those who receive a check every time receive
-special recognition.</p>
-
-<p><em>Object</em>: To encourage initiative; to impress
-upon each pupil his rank in the writing game;
-to crystallize the week’s work; to give each pupil
-an opportunity for individual help.</p>
-
-
-<h3>SEGREGATION</h3>
-
-<p>(Explained in detail in <a href="#Chapter_II">Chapter Two</a>.) The
-teaching of penmanship is less laborious and
-more effective when the poor writers are separated
-from the good writers. Many pupils need
-no individual help, but follow oral instructions
-easily. They should be allowed to do so, since
-independent effort will develop judgment, initiative,
-industry, and an appreciation of how to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[79]</span>
-“play the game square.” The segregation of the
-poor writers in rows economizes the teacher’s
-time and energy in passing about the room, and
-ultimately allows each pupil to practice upon the
-drill he most needs. While the poor writers
-should never be considered in disgrace, a legitimate
-aim should be to get into the good division
-on the regular promotion day, preferably Friday.</p>
-
-<p>Segregation is especially desirable for board
-work, since it economizes the time and energy of
-the teacher to a marked degree.</p>
-
-
-<h3>LINE QUALITY</h3>
-
-<p><em>At the seat</em>: Make not less than 200 solid two-space
-ovals or strokes with one dip of ink. This
-will make for neatness. Allow no strike-overs,
-i. e., patched lines. Correct position of the hand,
-correct speed, a limited amount of ink, and a good
-movement are the surest remedies for neatness
-and good line quality. Always use two sheets of
-paper in order to obtain the best line quality and
-save the pen. Hold pen with hole on top so that
-both nibs touch the paper, in order to secure even
-quality. Hold pen or pencil lightly enough that
-it may be slipped out easily from the hand.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[80]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>SAMPLES</h3>
-
-<p>Monthly samples have a place in and above the
-third grade. Make two or more samples on the
-15th of each month, during the writing period.
-Select the best one and place in the manila envelope
-provided for this purpose only. Place
-name of pupil on envelope. Collect at the close
-of the period. Place rubber band around them
-and file in your desk.</p>
-
-<p><em>Object</em>: Teachers may judge the effectiveness
-of their instruction; pupils may observe their own
-improvement; the grade of the pupil is to be partially
-based on this work; the supervisor may be
-able to advise constructively; the pupil has an
-opportunity to compete with himself.</p>
-
-<p><em>Procedure</em>: Have paper cut, and sample on
-board, memorized. Give warming up exercises
-of ovals, capital, name, and small <em>o</em> exercise.
-Consume five or more minutes in this way. Use
-your watch, time the class. Record the speed on
-the sample. After each sample, relax. Make
-two or three, as time permits. Select the best.
-Discard others. Open sample envelopes, compare
-with sample of month before. Give a check
-of honor to all who have improved to a marked
-degree. The first month, check for better movement,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[81]</span>
-neatness and light line; second month, size,
-etc. Always hold for all points before considered.
-Tell class at end of checking what in general
-you see they need, and keep that in mind
-during the month. Count the pupils who have
-two samples and those who receive checks, ascertain
-your per cent of improvement and record it
-for reference next month. Collect sample envelopes
-and file in your desk.</p>
-
-<p><em>Caution</em>: There is no objection to the giving of
-a day of practice to the matter contained in the
-sample during the month if the time permits; in
-fact, this would be helpful. However, on the
-15th, the allotted time only should be allowed for
-writing the sample, which should proceed in general
-as above outlined.</p>
-
-<p><em>Standard</em>: Third and fourth grades attain
-50% improvement each month. Fifth and sixth
-grades should attain 66% improvement each
-month. Seventh and eighth grades should attain
-75% improvement each month.</p>
-
-
-<h3>PREPARATION FOR REGULAR VISIT OF THE
-SUPERVISOR</h3>
-
-<p>First grade: Two models for every child at
-board.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[82]</span></p>
-
-<p>Second grade: After the second month a writing
-lesson saved from the previous week; after the
-third month, a spelling lesson.</p>
-
-<p>Third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth and
-ninth grades: Have on the desk ready for grading,
-the following: samples, spelling paper, language
-paper.</p>
-
-<p>Give pupils an opportunity to see that all work
-to be inspected is ready the day previous to the
-supervisor’s visit. (For ordinary lessons one
-minute is ample time for preparation if folders are
-kept in good order.) Placing one lesson of the
-applied work in the folio each week, from which
-the final selection is to be made, will serve to keep
-the work uniformly good. This would also provide
-specimens for those who might be absent for
-a particular lesson written expressly for this
-purpose.</p>
-
-
-<h3>DESK ARRANGEMENT</h3>
-
-
-<p class="center">Aisle</p>
-
-<div class="center">
-<div class="boxit2 displayinline" style="margin-right:0.5em">
-<p style="line-height:1.5">Oct. Spell. <span style="padding-left:1.5em">Sept. Sample</span><br />
-Oct. Lang. <span style="padding-left:1.5em">Oct. Sample</span></p>
-</div>
-
-<div class="boxit2 displayinline" style="margin-left:0.5em">
-<p style="line-height:1.5">Sept. Sample <span style="padding-left:1.15em">Oct. Spell.</span><br />
-Oct. Sample <span style="padding-left:1.5em">Oct. Lang.</span></p>
-</div>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[83]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>COUNTING</h3>
-
-<p>In counting for words repeat the letters at correct
-speed, sentences likewise, using great care
-that the finish is within the time limit. In pronouncing
-spelling words to be used during penmanship
-drill, always require the class to repeat
-the words after you before writing. A short dictated
-sentence should be managed the same way.</p>
-
-
-<h3>USE OF THE TIMEPIECE</h3>
-
-<p>This is as necessary to the good teacher of penmanship
-as is the blackboard. By its use is obtained
-correct speed, alertness on the part of the
-teacher, good movement because never too slow,
-more rhythmical counting, and more practice accomplished.
-Use the second hand daily, until
-counting becomes automatic and goes forward
-with the right kind of speed at all times.</p>
-
-
-<h3>AWARDS</h3>
-
-<p>Honor rolls, buttons, certificates, pennants,
-cups, etc., prove a great incentive. All competition
-should be carried on in a friendly manner.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[84]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>USE OF STANDARD PENMANSHIP TESTS</h3>
-
-<p>The research department may very profitably
-apply the standard tests throughout the city twice
-yearly, tabulate the results and publish them to
-teachers. From these findings, principals, supervisors,
-and teachers will be able to determine
-what the weaknesses are and find a remedy for
-them.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[85]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_VII"><span class="smcap">Chapter Seven</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">SUGGESTIONS FOR THE GRADES, JUNIOR AND SENIOR HIGH SCHOOLS</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>A GENERAL, NOT A SPECIFIC PLAN</h3>
-
-<p>In suggesting this plan no endeavor has been
-made to be definite, except in a few essentials.
-Writing texts and conditions in schools differ so
-greatly that this would be impossible. An effort
-has been made to build up from the first grade to
-the last a general plan of a logical character.
-Many suggestions made for the second and third
-grades could wisely be put into operation, in part,
-in the higher grades. It is assumed first that the
-muscular movement method has been adopted
-and that each child has the use of a manual, since
-that is the only condition under which an adaptation
-of these suggestions would be advisable.
-This bird’s eye view of the subject is not to be
-considered in any respect a “system” of writing,
-in text book phraseology.</p>
-
-<p>It will be impossible to advantageously adapt
-the suggested plan unless a comprehensive knowledge<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[86]</span>
-of muscular movement has already been
-gained through actual practice on the part of the
-teacher.</p>
-
-
-<h3>FIRST GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>Child nature is spontaneous, active, restless.
-It prefers objects to subjects, expression to repression
-and generality to detail. Writing is a
-slow and laborious method of expression compared
-to speech, and therefore not well suited to
-childhood. More oral, and less written language
-should be given primary grades. But so long as
-writing seems a necessary part of primary education,
-it should be taught in the most rational
-manner. To do this, it is necessary to consider
-the child, its capacity to acquire knowledge and
-skill, and its future welfare, as concerns health
-and handwriting.</p>
-
-<p>One very noticeable feature about the activity
-of childhood is the exercise of the larger muscles
-which it invariably involves. The movements
-are of the whole body, and not of mere portions
-of it. The fundamental muscles and not the delicate
-and finely coordinated muscles are employed
-in all their movements. Such muscles (the accessory)
-as are engaged in fine writing, drawing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[87]</span>
-and sewing are developed later. Especially is
-this true of the muscles of the eye. Ignorance of
-these facts has led to mistakes in training.</p>
-
-<p>The wise teacher will not compel or permit
-young pupils to follow a fine copy in writing, but
-will encourage them to use the blackboard where
-abundant opportunity will be given for exercising
-the larger muscles. Proper regard for the future
-usefulness of the eyes of the child certainly requires
-that a departure be made from the method
-now prevalent of requiring so much written work.</p>
-
-<p>Childhood has been called the language period
-par excellence, but this statement has reference to
-oral and not written forms of speech. Every
-teacher knows how easily and rapidly the child
-gains a vocabulary at this stage. He learns language
-by imitation, and the whole epoch of childhood
-is, as psychology teaches, and William
-Wordsworth expresses it, “one endless imitation.”
-It therefore behooves the teacher to neglect,
-if anything, reading and writing during the
-early stage of childhood, and make play and
-story telling the predominant work in the years
-preceding eight.</p>
-
-<p>One of the most difficult as well as one of the
-most interesting problems that confronts every
-first grade teacher is what and how much of writing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[88]</span>
-we shall do in the first year. Shall we use all
-our time teaching form? Shall we teach movement
-work entirely and let form alone? Or shall
-we try a combination of both?</p>
-
-<p>It is unfortunate that many of the courses of
-study which we must follow state specifically that
-when the pupils leave the first grade they must be
-able to write all the small letters, capital letters,
-words and sentences on paper. Some courses demand
-that pupils must do a certain amount of
-copying. This is very unfortunate, because in
-trying to fulfill the requirements of such a course
-of study any means available are often resorted
-to and frequently the methods used are a great
-hindrance to the future development of the child,
-both physically and mentally.</p>
-
-<p>The following suggestions are offered first
-grade teachers:</p>
-
-<p>Under proper instruction the pupils will go
-into the next grade with the ability to express
-themselves freely and easily at the blackboard.
-It is quite unnecessary and unpedagogical to
-teach children a habit that in the course of a few
-years must be given up entirely; reference is here
-made to teaching of finger movement in the first
-three grades.</p>
-
-<p><em>One B grade aim</em>: To introduce pupils in this<span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[89]</span>
-grade to all small letters in short words. To attain
-an average speed of thirty letters per minute.</p>
-
-<p><em>One A grade aim</em>: To introduce pupils in this
-grade to all capital letter forms in families. To
-review all small letters in words and sentences.
-To attain a speed of thirty-five letters per minute.
-To give pupils by the end of the term, a tool
-for handling spelling and language in a satisfactory
-manner at the blackboard.</p>
-
-<p><em>Material</em>: Compendium (optional), crayon,
-eraser. The blackboard should be ruled with lines
-four inches apart beginning at the bottom and
-extending six lines in height. Eighteen to twenty
-inches is sufficient board space for each child.
-More practice and correspondingly better results
-follow when the entire class is at the board at
-one time.</p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: Fifteen minutes daily, five
-times per week. Place the period early in the
-day or just before spelling so that it may function.
-Writing is an inter-recitation activity.
-Practicing the daily lesson will be found very
-profitable.</p>
-
-<p><em>Demonstration</em>: Each drill should be demonstrated
-briefly from one to three times each day
-of presentation. Blackboard models for tracing
-should be provided for each pupil daily. Good<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[90]</span>
-models are a necessity because of the inconvenience
-of using compendiums at the board.</p>
-
-<p><em>Distribution of time to subject matter</em>: At the
-beginning of each term devote one-half to one-third
-of the lesson to movement drill. Tracing
-and writing consume the remainder of the period.
-As skill increases reduce the amount of time to
-one minute on movement drill and divide the remainder
-equally between words and sentences.
-The board should be filled ten times during one
-lesson. <em>One A</em> children should fill the board once
-daily with the figure represented in the current
-date.</p>
-
-<p><em>Names</em>: Pupils should write their names as
-early as possible in the term. After the capital
-“I” has been mastered use the following form
-for name practice: “I am (name).”</p>
-
-<p><em>Z Group</em>: This group proceeds at a slower rate
-of speed, attaining at the end of the year scarcely
-thirty letters per minute. More frequent demonstration
-is necessary. Use as many two-letter
-words as possible. Select words from the reading
-as far as practicable. More blackboard work,
-tracing and rhythmic drill are necessary than in
-other classes.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[91]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>SECOND GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>Primary teachers are frequently opposed to
-muscular movement because it is wholly impossible
-to obtain the same uniform work (which is
-really only useless drawing) as can be obtained
-by the finger movement plan. Not until principals,
-primary supervisors, and superintendents
-are willing to tell their primary teachers that they
-will not look for beautiful written exercises in
-these grades, will the teachers of the first, second,
-and third grades look with favor upon muscular
-movement.</p>
-
-<p>We do not expect the primary teacher to produce
-the finished mathematicians, readers, historians,
-or penmen, but such work as is accomplished
-should be based on the right foundation.
-The primary teacher should be willing to sacrifice
-her pride in the appearance of written exercises
-to the demands of the future environment
-of the grown child. In schools where superintendents
-and teachers insist upon pupils writing
-words or sentences on paper very soon after they
-enter school little or no advancement can be
-made in muscular movement. However, if movement
-is not taught at an early age much time
-will be wasted when the transition is made, which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[92]</span>
-a few extreme persons say should not take place
-until the fifth year in school. In the latter case
-the pupils have incorrect habits so firmly fixed
-that it takes the remaining years in the elementary
-school to learn to write a creditable style.</p>
-
-<p>Board work may be continued advantageously
-daily in the second grade for a three or four minute
-period. The writing for the first month might
-very profitably be given over to board training to
-a large extent, retaining only five or six minutes
-daily to teach the physical-training phase of penmanship.
-Relaxation, correct posture of the
-body, feet, hands, and arms at the seat might be
-accomplished during the first month.</p>
-
-<p>The next step will be to study the hand and
-arm, making the preparatory movement for ovals,
-and strokes with the hand half open and gliding
-on the nails. The five knuckles must be turned
-toward the ceiling. Pupils should make the
-movement freely to the teacher’s count and also
-count for themselves in low tones. The teacher
-might use a book or a thin board to serve as a
-desk, with which to illustrate, in order to establish
-the proper relation in the child’s mind concerning
-the desk and the points of contact. (See
-detailed directions under <a href="#CHAPTER_IIA">posture</a>, Chapter Two.)
-Pencil holding is next taught, using the handle<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[93]</span>
-end first, and pointing it half way between the
-shoulder and the elbow. It will take a month or
-more to develop relaxation, correct posture, and
-penholding.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: First month. To perfect the board writing.
-To review all capitals and small letter forms
-in words and sentences, and attain greater fluency
-and a higher degree of perfection in form.
-To attain a speed of forty letters per minute, the
-standard speed for this grade. To teach the form
-of the letters so well, that in the seat work next
-month when movement is the great problem, form
-may not need to be stressed, but will be a resource.</p>
-
-<p>Second month: To develop relaxation, correct
-posture, movement, and speed sufficient to prevent
-finger movement. To apply these fundamental
-principles to ovals, a few easy capitals, a limited
-number of words and a few short sentences. To
-make the correct writing habit carry over into the
-spelling by the end of the 2 B grade.</p>
-
-<p><em>Comparison</em>: Save one of the pupil’s first lessons
-in both regular and applied work to be compared
-with later ones.</p>
-
-<p><em>Material</em>: Canary paper, cut into half sheets,
-compendium, pencil, folio seven by nine inches.
-Keep only writing material in these folios.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[94]</span></p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: Fifteen minutes daily, five
-times per week. Blackboard practice on the daily
-lesson is suggested as an inter-recitation activity.
-Place the writing period early in the day or prior
-to the spelling in order that it may function in the
-applied work.</p>
-
-<p><em>Demonstration</em>: The same directions that are
-given under first grade for ruling boards and
-demonstration procedure will be found useful.</p>
-
-<p><em>Z Group</em>: This group proceeds at a slower rate
-of speed than other groups and attains at the end
-of the 2 A a speed of thirty or more letters per
-minute instead of forty. Demonstrate more frequently.
-Use as many two-letter words as possible.
-Select words from the reading as far as
-practicable. More blackboard work, tracing and
-rhythmic drill are necessary than in other classes.</p>
-
-<p><em>Distribution of time to subject matter</em>: During
-the first month give the greater part of the writing
-period to movement drills. For the following
-months spend one-half to one-third of the period
-on movement drills, the remainder being divided
-between capital letters and words and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Headings</em>: Use the following heading daily,
-placing it on the second blue line. Write on every
-line except the first below the heading. Model:</p>
-
-<p class="center">John Brown, 2 A, Sept. 15, 1924.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[95]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>THIRD GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>We will assume that all pupils so far advanced
-as the third grade are able to make all the letter
-forms easily and can write words and sentences
-upon the board. They should also be able to
-make straight strokes and ovals, write words, sentences,
-and the most necessary capitals with the
-right movement, at the seats. In both cases they
-should observe correct posture, slant, speed, uniformity,
-and spacing between words. They should
-recognize the difference between connective lines,
-and observe the following rule for spacing between
-letters and words: The space between letters
-should be the width of the distance between
-the down strokes in small <em>u</em>, the space between
-words should be the entire width of small <em>i</em>.</p>
-
-<p>Doctor Ayres has proved by comparing many
-specimens that one of the greatest drawbacks to
-legibility rests in the fact that the letters are
-crowded together. It would be better to allow extreme
-spacing rather than to permit the pupils to
-huddle the letters together using barely half as
-much space between letters as they should. The
-space around the letters relieves the eye of the
-reader, and makes even irregular and crudely
-formed words fairly legible. The pupils who have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[96]</span>
-been well trained in movement can slide easily
-from one letter to another with the right-length
-connective stroke.</p>
-
-<p>Pupils at the beginning of the third year in
-school will often appear to have forgotten much
-that they have been taught in penmanship, as in
-other subjects. During the vacation the muscles
-have become somewhat tense, therefore relaxing
-exercises should be given frequently in order to
-regain what has been lost. (See directions under
-<a href="#CHAPTER_IIB">physical training phase</a>, Chapter Two.) It will be
-well to give at least one week’s practice at the
-board, two short lessons daily. Review the letter
-forms, ending each lesson with a word. The
-second week have pupils take pens a few minutes
-daily and review ovals and strokes, preliminary
-to writing the exercises that will lead directly to
-word and sentence building.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To develop relaxation, correct posture,
-easy movement, sufficient speed to prevent finger
-movement, and to apply these fundamental principles
-to all writing lessons, spelling and copy
-work. The grade is to be based upon whether or
-not the pupil uses the arm movement during penmanship,
-copy work and spelling. Grade “Failure”
-if movement is not used as above directed.
-Attain a speed of fifty letters per minute in words
-and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[97]</span></p>
-
-<p><em>Material</em>: Compendium, white paper half
-sheets, coarse pen, penholder, ink, penwiper, blotter,
-manila envelope for sample, folio, seven by
-nine inches, in which penmanship material only
-is to be kept. Teachers should write pupils’
-names on folios. On Mondays pass enough paper
-for the week.</p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: Fifteen minutes daily, five
-times per week. After correct habits are established,
-encourage home practice. Place the penmanship
-period early in the day or prior to the
-spelling in order that it may function properly.</p>
-
-<p><em>Distribution of time to subject matter</em>: During
-the first month give one-half or more of the time
-to good habit formation by use of movement
-drills. For the following months spend one-third
-of the period on ovals, little <em>o</em>, or the like, one-third
-on capital letters, and one-third on words
-and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Heading</em>: Place the following heading daily
-on the second blue line. Write on every line except
-the first below the heading. Model:</p>
-
-<p class="center">John Brown, 3 B, Sept. 15, 1924.</p>
-
-<p><em>Sample</em>: Memorize the following sample which
-is to be taken the middle of each month. Model:</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[98]</span></p>
-
-<p class="center">John Brown, <span style="padding-left:1em;padding-right:1em">3 B,</span> Sept. 15, 1924.</p>
-
-<p class="center">John Doe School<br />
-City, State.<br />
-(Skip a line.)<br />
-I use a free swing<br />
-I use a free swing<br />
-I use a free swing</p>
-
-
-<h3>FOURTH GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>The demand for more and better written work
-will become practically imperative in the fourth
-year. The child will be able to meet the demand
-because he will have nothing to undo, having
-spent all the time devoted to penmanship in working
-on a correct foundation. The efforts may be
-crude. However, technique in the beginning is of
-less importance than that the proper habits may
-be established. It will be necessary for the teacher
-of this grade to require of the pupils all that
-has been required before and to improve upon
-what has been done.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To develop relaxation, correct posture,
-easy movement, sufficient speed to prevent finger
-movement and to apply these fundamental principles
-to all writing lessons, spelling, and copy<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[99]</span>
-work. The grade is to be based upon whether or
-not the pupil uses arm movement during the penmanship
-period, copy work, and spelling. Grade
-“Failure” if movement is not used as above directed.
-Attain a speed of sixty letters per minute
-in words and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Materials</em>: Compendium, white paper half
-sheets, coarse pen, penholder, ink, penwiper, blotter,
-manila envelopes for samples, folio seven by
-nine inches in which writing material only is to
-be kept. Teacher should label folios with name
-of pupil. On Monday pass enough paper for the
-week.</p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: Twenty minutes daily, five
-times per week. After correct habits are established
-encourage home practice. Place the writing
-period early in the day or prior to the spelling
-in order that it may function properly.</p>
-
-<p><em>Distribution of time to subject matter</em>: During
-the first month give one-half or more of the time
-to good habit formation by use of movement
-drills. For the remainder of the year spend one-third
-of the period on ovals, little <em>o</em> drill, and the
-like, one-third on capital letters and one-third on
-words and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Heading</em>: Place the following heading daily
-on the second blue line. Write on every line except
-the first below the heading. Model:</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[100]</span></p>
-
-<p class="center">John Brown, <span style="padding-left:1em;padding-right:1em">4 B,</span> Sept. 15, 1924</p>
-
-<p><em>Sample</em>: Memorize the following sample which
-is to be made the middle of each month. Model:</p>
-
-<p class="center">John Brown, <span style="padding-left:1em;padding-right:1em">4 B,</span> Sept. 15, 1924<br />
-John Doe School<br />
-City, State<br />
-(Skip a line)<br />
-I use a free swing<br />
-I use a free swing<br />
-I use a free swing</p>
-
-
-<h3>FIFTH GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>Since pupils in the fifth grade are better developed
-mentally and physically than those in the
-preceding grade we may reasonably expect a better
-quality of penmanship from them. In this
-grade especially, pupils should be taught to work
-independently, that is, correctly without the guidance
-of the teacher. They cannot go on forever
-with a supporting prop. It is marvelous how
-much they will develop if led to become independent.
-By way of assisting them, give pupils a
-study plan and a small portion of the lesson time,
-perhaps two minutes, during which time make
-mental note of the points neglected by the majority<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[101]</span>
-of the class. With this as a basis to work upon
-make the next lesson strong on the points in
-which the pupils, when working independently,
-seem the weakest. If pupils have established the
-correct habits a half-hour of practice at home or
-at school should not weary them. Many will
-practice longer of their own accord.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To develop relaxation, correct posture,
-easy movement, and sufficient speed to prevent
-finger movement and to apply these fundamental
-principles to all penmanship lessons, spelling,
-copy, and dictation work. Grade “Failure” unless
-movement is used as indicated above. Attain
-a speed of seventy letters per minute in words and
-sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Material</em>: Compendium, full size sheets of
-white paper, ink, blotter, heavy brown folios, nine
-by twelve inches, coarse pen, wooden penholder,
-pen-wiper, manila envelope for samples. Keep
-writing material only in these folios. Teacher
-should label folios with the name of the pupil.
-Monday pass to each pupil enough paper for the
-week.</p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: Twenty minutes daily, five
-times per week. Place the writing period early
-in the day or prior to the spelling in order that it
-may function in applied work.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[102]</span></p>
-
-<p><em>Distribution of time to subject matter</em>: During
-the first month spend half or more of the time in
-developing posture, movement, and movement
-drills. After the first month devote to movement
-drills, ovals, little letters and the like, one-third
-to one-fourth of the period; to capital letters, half
-the remaining time; to words or sentences the remainder
-of the period.</p>
-
-<p><em>Heading</em>: Place on the second blue line. Write
-on every line except the first below the heading.
-Model:</p>
-
-<p class="center">John Brown, <span style="padding-left:1em;padding-right:1em">5 B,</span> Sept. 15, 1924</p>
-
-<p><em>Sample</em>: Take sample on the middle of each
-month. Memorize. Model:</p>
-
-<p class="center">
-John Brown, <span style="padding-left:1em;padding-right:1em">5 B,</span> Sept. 15, 1924<br />
-John Doe School<br />
-City, State<br />
-(Skip a line)<br />
-ABCDEFGHIJKLM<br />
-NOPQRSTUVWXYZ<br />
-(Skip a line)<br />
-This is a sample of my best writing<br />
-This is a sample of my best writing<br />
-This is a sample of my best writing</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[103]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>SIXTH GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>As classes pass from grade to grade, with each
-member accomplishing what he should according
-to his grade, by the time they reach the sixth, the
-correct writing habit should be firmly fixed. It
-is well to have it so, for now, more than ever before
-does the pupil have need of this energy and
-time saving habit. The demands for the application
-of the writing habit are daily growing more
-numerous.</p>
-
-<p>The penmanship lesson should now be devoted
-largely to further study of good letter forms, providing
-pupils automatically use muscular movement.
-Pupils of this age will now recognize what
-the former training means. They will now be interested
-because they realize that they have been
-gaining something that will be very useful to
-them.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To develop relaxation, correct posture,
-easy movement, and sufficient speed to prevent
-finger movement and to apply fundamental principles
-to all written exercises except arithmetic.
-Grade “Failure” unless movement is used as indicated
-above. Attain a speed of eighty letters
-per minute in words and sentences.</p>
-
-<p>The material, length of lesson, distribution of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[104]</span>
-time to subject matter, heading and samples may
-profitably be the same as for the fifth grade.</p>
-
-
-<h3>SEVENTH GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>In a school where each teacher has done her
-share of the work outlined according to the grade
-it will be observed that the quality of the penmanship
-produced by seventh grade pupils will in
-many cases equal that of adults. Adult learners,
-if they have in previous years used finger movement
-will have more to overcome than seventh
-grade pupils.</p>
-
-<p>It is well at all times to keep the goal in view,
-and gradually work toward it. Never permit pupils
-to drift. During penmanship lessons frequent
-comparisons with the models is essential.
-Friendly competition has a place. Let parallel
-grades of the same school or neighboring schools
-compare work. Take into consideration in the
-competition, first, legibility, then time consumed
-for the execution of the exercise, uniformity,
-slant, spacing, size and connecting and ending
-strokes.</p>
-
-<p>Many pupils no doubt do not use discretion in
-the selection of proper equipment for home work.
-They should realize that the right heights of table<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[105]</span>
-and chair mean much for comfort and therefore
-have direct relation to physical endurance. The
-use of the timepiece in order to keep up the right
-speed is an important point. Every exercise in
-the manual practiced at the right rate of speed
-will enable seventh grade pupils to acquire an average
-speed of fifteen to eighteen words per minute.
-Teach each pupil to be systematic in his
-homework as well as at school.</p>
-
-<p>In this grade it is interesting at times to allow
-a pupil who has a sense of rhythm in penmanship
-well developed to play the piano, selecting a
-march to which the pupils might write certain
-drills. The phonograph may be used to good
-advantage for the purpose of giving variety to the
-drill work. Pupils will enjoy writing the drills
-to the music. They must appreciate more fully
-than ever the fact that each school subject depends
-to a great extent upon others, penmanship
-being no exception. The sense of rhythm which
-should come from the study of music will often be
-the inspiration that will move pupils to the right
-speed when everything else fails. When pupils
-write to the rhythm produced by their own voices,
-such as concert counting, relaxation of the muscles
-takes place easily.</p>
-
-<p>It has proven very satisfactory to appoint a captain,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[106]</span>
-perhaps the best penman in the row, to do
-the counting for the preliminary drills with which
-each lesson should begin. This relieves the teacher
-of useless voice work and helps to develop initiative
-on the part of the pupils. It will be necessary
-for pupils who do this work to count exactly
-right, first with the teacher, and later alone. They
-should next learn to count and work at the same
-time.</p>
-
-<p>Finally, pupils may well observe all the suggestions
-made in previous grades. They should,
-however, be able to produce much more finished
-results than in the previous grade.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To develop relaxation, correct posture,
-easy movement, sufficient speed to prevent finger
-movement, and to apply these fundamental principles
-to all written exercises. Grade “Failure”
-unless movement is applied as indicated above.
-Attain a speed of ninety letters in words and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: Twenty minutes daily, three
-to five times per week. The material, distribution
-of time to subject matter, heading and samples
-may profitably be the same as for the fifth
-grade.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[107]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>EIGHTH GRADE</h3>
-
-<p>It now remains for the eighth grade teacher to
-receive the pupils who have been for the last seven
-years building among other useful habits the
-penmanship structure. The writing is perhaps
-one of the first subjects to be criticized or commented
-upon when the class is promoted. The
-evidence will be plainly for or against it.</p>
-
-<p>It is a common occurrence for a piano pupil
-after discontinuing practice to refuse to perform.
-An athlete out of practice is an awkward figure
-when getting back into form. Therefore, as penmanship
-is applied physical training it is not surprising
-that pupils who do not keep up practice
-to a reasonable extent soon lose skill. If the daily
-practice must be application to other subjects,
-and not drill work, great care should be exercised
-to make conditions favorable for the retention of
-the correct penmanship habit.</p>
-
-<p>It should be the privilege and duty of the pupils
-of this grade so far as possible to place all
-problems, etc., on the board for the teacher. Pupils
-of this age should be given every opportunity
-to use their good penmanship in any and all kinds
-of clerical work. They like to feel that they are
-helpful, and this spirit should be fostered. It is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[108]</span>
-a saving of the teacher’s time and strength, and
-impresses pupils with the practical value of good
-writing.</p>
-
-<p>As these pupils pass through the junior high
-school, the senior high school, commercial colleges
-or universities and out into the actual business
-world, they will take on that individuality
-in penmanship which suits best. The appearance
-of their writing will be considerably modified
-owing to the different conditions under which
-each one performs his tasks. This is a matter of
-minor importance.</p>
-
-<p>The important question for each teacher and
-each pupil to answer in the affirmative is this: Is
-the writing habit acquired in the grades the correct
-one? The crown of all the efforts should be
-an energy and time saving manner of writing that
-will be entirely readable.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To develop relaxation, correct posture,
-easy movement, sufficient speed to prevent finger
-movement and to apply these fundamental principles
-to all written exercises. Grade “Failure”
-unless movement is applied as indicated above.
-Attain a speed of one hundred letters in words
-and sentences.</p>
-
-<p><em>Length of lesson</em>: See seventh grade.</p>
-
-<p>The material, distribution of time to subject<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[109]</span>
-matter, heading and samples may profitably be
-the same as for the three preceding grades.</p>
-
-
-<h3>JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL</h3>
-
-<p>When the seventh, eighth, and ninth grades are
-set off by themselves and take the name of Junior
-High School, conditions are somewhat different
-than when they remain a part of the grade system.</p>
-
-<p>The ideals of the schools differ, as they should,
-in some respects. A most striking difference is
-that a greater freedom in the choice of subjects is
-made possible in the junior high school.</p>
-
-<p>The tool subjects are wisely still obligatory
-and penmanship should be pursued until mastered
-sufficiently well to be a resource and not a
-liability in carrying on other subjects.</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To perfect penmanship as a tool for
-school work and to impress those who plan to
-enter upon business careers at the end of the
-ninth year with the fact that they should be especially
-serious in penmanship preparation.</p>
-
-<p><em>Material</em>: Similar to that suggested for preceding
-grades.</p>
-
-<p><em>Required subject</em>: Penmanship should be required
-through the seventh grade and of all<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[110]</span>
-eighth grade pupils who cannot meet a reasonably
-high standard previously agreed upon by the
-principal, supervisor, and teachers.</p>
-
-<p><em>Administration of tests</em>: These should be given
-several weeks before the end of each semester in
-order to permit pupils who have not reached the
-standard set to include penmanship in their programs.</p>
-
-<p>Ninth grade pupils who are specializing in
-commercial subjects should have an opportunity
-for daily drill in penmanship in order to perfect
-their work to a higher degree. The materials,
-distribution of time to subject matter, form for
-headings, and samples may profitably be similar
-to that suggested for former grades.</p>
-
-<p>The junior high teacher does not have the same
-opportunity that the grade teacher enjoys for the
-observation of results unless it is so arranged that
-the penmanship teacher handles spelling also. In
-such a case by using tact, firmness and some invention
-this period of application may prove almost
-or quite as valuable to the acquisition of the
-correct writing habit as the time devoted to the
-learning of the drills.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[111]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL</h3>
-
-<p>Theoretically, students in the senior high school
-should not find it necessary to pursue penmanship
-for acquisition as a tool, but practically, we
-find many who are so unskilled in this subject
-that it is necessary to make provision for them.</p>
-
-<p>In any senior high school we may have pupils
-who have not had the advantages of a good foundation
-in the grades or in junior high. Again,
-there are those who acquire manual dexterity
-with great difficulty. Lastly, we have great numbers
-that are qualifying for commercial lines. The
-needs of all must be met. (Discussed more fully
-in <a href="#Chapter_I">Chapter One</a>.)</p>
-
-<p><em>Aim</em>: To provide every student who leaves the
-senior high school with a good working tool for
-business or college. No possible excuse should be
-offered in place of a good handwriting by a senior
-high school graduate who has had the opportunity
-to qualify.</p>
-
-<p><em>Materials</em>: Similar to those in the junior high
-school.</p>
-
-<p><em>Required subject</em>: Penmanship should be required
-of all who cannot meet a reasonably high
-standard agreed upon by principal, supervisor,
-and teachers. Commercial students should qualify
-to a much higher degree than others.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[112]</span></p>
-
-<p>The administrations of tests, distribution of
-time to subject matter, samples, may well be carried
-on in a manner similar to that suggested for
-the upper grades and junior high school.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[113]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_VIII"><span class="smcap">Chapter Eight</span>
-<br /><span class="cheaderfont">SUPERVISION AND THE PENMANSHIP SUPERVISOR</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<h3>SUPERVISION IN THE PAST</h3>
-
-<p>Supervision had its rise in the early 70’s we
-are told. At that time educators began to follow
-to some extent the example of the world of industry.
-Lotus D. Coffman gives us as a humorous
-definition of the function of the early supervisor
-the following: “The business of a supervisor is
-to cast a genial influence over the schools, but
-otherwise he is not to interfere with the work of
-the schools.”</p>
-
-<p>Supervision is evolving, and the definition of
-today may need to be revised tomorrow. At present
-a supervisor represents the superintendent in
-certain well defined lines. As a principal he may
-have charge of a building. He may have charge
-of two or more subjects in a smaller city. He may
-have charge of one subject in a city, county, or
-state.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[114]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>FUNCTION OF THE SUPERVISOR</h3>
-
-<p>The first function of a supervisor is generally
-acknowledged to be improvement in classroom
-teaching. Let us place second the responsibility
-for a suitable course of study (in penmanship the
-selection of the text), and third, responsibility
-for standard methods whereby results may be
-measured.</p>
-
-
-<h3>LEADERSHIP A PRIME QUALIFICATION</h3>
-
-<p>Broad constructive leadership is the prime requisite
-for one who would take upon himself the
-arduous duties of supervisor, be it of one subject
-or of many. Each candidate should subject himself
-to a rigorous self-rating process before taking
-up supervision, and those in service should continue
-<em>to look within</em>. Many a situation would be
-saved to leadership and society if all who term
-themselves supervisors or even expect to some day
-become such would turn the white light of inspection
-upon themselves. It is not going too far to
-say that the prospective supervisor before launching
-himself should take unstinting pains to diagnose
-his ability as a leader.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[115]</span></p>
-
-
-<h3>PERSONALITY A NECESSARY QUALIFICATION</h3>
-
-<p>Supervisory positions are like others in that
-two main qualities are essential, namely, desirable
-personality and sufficient preparation. These
-essentials must be fairly well balanced in the person
-who is a candidate for a supervisory office.
-We are familiar with the type of supervisor who,
-though largely lacking scholastic attainments, is
-so pleasing as to give a certain desirable kind of
-service and who is therefore retained year after
-year. Compare such a supervisor with the reverse,
-the one who has all the professional degrees
-obtainable but who lacks the human touch. Neither
-type is entirely qualified.</p>
-
-<p>Teachers are good judges. Consult almost any
-teacher-made list for desirable qualities, and you
-will find that the points that make up a desirable
-personality are given preference to scholarship
-and other phases of preparation.</p>
-
-<p>Genuine leaders are always on the alert to improve
-themselves. When leaders are kind, constantly
-courteous, permit initiative, keep informed
-on current movements, exhibit tact, show
-industry, self-control, are optimistic, reliable,
-courageous, just, open-minded, progressive, sincere,
-tolerant; then, and then only, shall we cease<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[116]</span>
-to hear teachers speak of the worthlessness of supervision.
-(Perhaps poor supervision has been a
-large factor in fostering poor teaching.)</p>
-
-<p>Physical strength to meet the numerous demands
-is an essential. Desirable, in fact, necessary
-requisites are pleasing manners, such as
-poise, refinement, good speaking voice, and self
-possession. The exercise of good taste in the matter
-of correct and tasteful clothing goes far toward
-obtaining and holding the respect of those with
-whom a supervisor comes in contact. Dress
-should be simple and appropriate, of excellent
-quality, and not too striking. It has been the observation
-of the writer that supervisors, both men
-and women frequently use such excruciatingly
-bad taste in the matter of apparel that those who
-come in contact with them are very unfavorably
-impressed. It does not take a great deal of imagination
-to realize why the “celluloid collar man”
-and the “overdressed” or “home made” woman is
-not a welcome adjunct in the classroom or at
-neighborhood gatherings.</p>
-
-
-<h3>BROAD PREPARATION INDISPENSABLE
-TO THE SUPERVISOR</h3>
-
-<p>In the not distant past special-subject supervisors
-found it possible to qualify with no further<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[117]</span>
-general preparation than a high school diploma
-and a summer session or two at some higher institution.
-This is now legally impossible in many
-states and wisely so. A general college course is
-desirable, and particularly so since supervisors
-are apt to have occasion to direct teachers who
-have had such training. Supervisors are criticized,
-often justly, for being narrow and knowing
-only one subject. Older supervisors should avail
-themselves of the many opportunities for professional
-growth.</p>
-
-<p>In addition to being a graduate of high school
-and college a supervisor of a special subject
-should have special training and practice teaching
-along the line that he is supervising. Graduate
-work on the part of the general supervisor
-as the years go by is becoming almost a necessity.</p>
-
-<p>Travel is an essential part of education. It is
-not putting it too strongly to say that all supervisors
-should spend a part of nearly every summer
-in travel or at some university. Exception may
-be made of those who are called upon to contribute
-to some higher institution as instructors.</p>
-
-<p>Every year worthy new educational books
-come from the press, and many worth-while articles
-are published in educational journals. Supervisors
-who have a real message should be willing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[118]</span>
-to contribute to these journals. By working
-out such articles the authors clarify their own
-ideas and inspire their fellow workers. Careful
-reading of educational journals is bound to keep
-special-subject supervisors aware of the general
-trend of education. Technical journals should
-each month find their way to the desk of the supervisor
-of special subjects.</p>
-
-<p>It is assumed that no person would be unwise
-enough to attempt any sort of supervision before
-having served a probationary term in the grades
-and if possible in high school. This gives the
-proper background for effective supervision. The
-best supervisors are always in a process of preparation
-and each year adds its quota of experience,
-rounding off here, burnishing up there,
-softening a high light of deficiency and blending
-all into a more helpful and desirable whole.</p>
-
-
-<h3>CONTINUAL PREPARATION ESSENTIAL</h3>
-
-<p>Let us assume that a person with such a personality
-and scholarship as was mentioned earlier
-in this chapter is now launched in a supervisory
-position. That person does not cease his preparation
-but rather continues it along practical lines
-which may include some or all of the features
-that are mentioned below.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[119]</span></p>
-
-<p>The supervisor who has a sound knowledge of
-educational method will be able to improve class
-room teaching and this is the primary purpose of
-supervision.</p>
-
-<p>The course of study is a feature that any supervisor
-should be constantly preparing to deal with,
-but mainly in connection with suggestions from
-the teachers who are dealing first hand with the
-children. It is the part of wisdom and justice to
-capitalize the strength of the teaching force, always
-giving due credit therefor.</p>
-
-<p>The supervisor knows how to administer standard
-tests, and is prepared to stand by the findings.
-He is willing to point out the need of special educational
-treatment in specific cases. He must be
-prepared to place especially talented children in
-their place and without fear. Each child should
-have <em>his</em> opportunity, according to Dr. Virgil
-Dickson. This is real democracy.</p>
-
-<p>The penmanship supervisor should at any time
-be able to demonstrate his subject with the aid
-of the class for the benefit of the teacher. One
-thing is an essential, however: The supervisor
-must do this in an artistic manner, and vastly
-better than the teacher can do it. Demonstration
-lessons are no doubt the most popular help
-that can be rendered to teachers. Teachers like<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[120]</span>
-to see how some one else meets the classroom
-problem, and it is a golden time for the supervisor
-to inculcate sound educational principles and
-good practice.</p>
-
-<p>The supervisor should be prepared to administer
-details such as routine matters, to plan visiting
-days that are really worth while, to select
-texts, material, etc.</p>
-
-<p>Supervisors should not only be constantly preparing
-themselves for greater usefulness but
-should stand ready through courses provided by
-themselves to offer encouragement in extension
-work, worth-while meetings, and in the planning
-of educational exhibits. Such exhibits should be
-kept by the supervisors in order to show new
-teachers what has been attained in former years.
-Standards can easily be made clear in this fashion.</p>
-
-
-<h3>RATING</h3>
-
-<p>The much discussed problem of rating of teachers,
-first used in 1896 in Milwaukee, is the cause
-of considerable “grief” among many. We are all
-rated in one way or another, and after all why be
-sensitive about it? A good cure is a self rating
-card, filled in carefully, prayerfully, and then laid
-aside until next self rating day arrives. Self competition<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[121]</span>
-is bound to yield good results. Let us
-learn to look in the mirror without flinching.</p>
-
-<p>Whatever system is used the teacher should
-have a copy of the score card and thereby learn
-upon what qualities to place values. The score
-card is especially valuable for the reason just
-given. No teacher should rise or fall on the
-strength of one rating, or on the strength of the
-rating of one person. Boice, Elliott and Rugg
-have all contributed much in the way of score
-cards. Mr. Cook of South Dakota explains a
-most interesting and meritorious system in use in
-his state.</p>
-
-<p>It remains for Katherine Taylor Cranor to present
-the first self scoring card for the supervisor
-as an aid to efficiency in school work. It offers
-to each one upon whom the mantle of supervision
-has fallen food for thought. It must provoke
-any thinking person to a critical evaluation
-of himself and his work. The six main topics
-covered are in substance as follows:</p>
-
-<p>1. Educational, social, and personal qualifications:
-These include liberal education, tact, tolerance,
-poise, appearance, disposition, leadership,
-loyalty, ability to speak in public, patience, 260
-points.</p>
-
-<p>2. Course of study: Cooperation in making it,
-ability to interpret it, 140 points.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[122]</span></p>
-
-<p>3. Relationship to teachers: Wise selection,
-consideration of health of teachers, growth, self
-improvement, initiative, effect on their lives, community
-needs, 200 points.</p>
-
-<p>4. Duty toward instruction: Visiting classes,
-300 points.</p>
-
-<p>5. Attention to details: Text books, demonstrations,
-routine, 50 points.</p>
-
-<p>6. Publicity, 50 points.</p>
-
-<p style="margin-left:4em"><em>Total</em>, 1,000 points.</p>
-
-
-<h3>THE BEST QUALIFIED SUPERVISOR</h3>
-
-<p>Is it too much to say that the best qualified,
-the best prepared penmanship supervisor is the
-one that shares responsibility, is broad visioned,
-has both hand and heart culture, is helpful, courageous,
-and who still retains the human touch
-and most rapidly makes himself unnecessary to
-the teacher?</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[123]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="BIBLIOGRAPHY">BIBLIOGRAPHY</h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><cite>American Penman</cite> (Austin Norman Palmer, Editor), a
-monthly publication. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co.,
-New York City.</p>
-
-<p>Ayres, Dr. Leonard P., <cite>A Scale for Measuring the Handwriting
-of Adults</cite>. Division of Education, Russell
-Sage Foundation. New York City, 1915.</p>
-
-<p><cite>Business Educator</cite>, a monthly publication, Columbus, O.</p>
-
-<p><cite>Course of Study Monographs</cite>, Elementary Schools, No.
-5, Penmanship. Berkeley, California, 1921.</p>
-
-<p><cite>Course of Study, Syllabus in Penmanship</cite>, as adopted by
-the Board of Education, City of New York, Park
-Avenue and 59th Street, New York, 1921.</p>
-
-<p><cite>Course of Study, Handwriting</cite>, by Administrative Department,
-Colorado Springs Public Schools, Colorado
-Springs, Colorado, 1921.</p>
-
-<p>Daugherty, Mary L., “History of the Teaching of Handwriting
-in America,” <cite>Elementary School Journal</cite>, December,
-1917.</p>
-
-<p>Edson, Andrew W., Associate City Superintendent, New
-York, <cite>Muscular Movement in Its Practical Application</cite>.
-A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York, 1910.</p>
-
-<p>Freeman and Daugherty, <cite>How to Teach Handwriting</cite>.
-Houghton, Mifflin Co., Boston, 1923.</p>
-
-<p>Freeman, Frank Nugent, <cite>The Teaching of Handwriting</cite>.
-Houghton, Mifflin Co., Boston, 1914.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; “Present Day Issues in the Teaching of Handwriting,”
-<cite>Elementary School Journal</cite>, Sept., 1923.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[124]</span></p>
-
-<p>French, W. L., <cite>Psychology of Handwriting</cite>. Putnam,
-New York, 1914.</p>
-
-<p>Gray, Clarence Freeman, <cite>A Score Card for the Measurement
-of Handwriting</cite>. The University, Austin, Tex.,
-1915.</p>
-
-<p>Hiles, Leta Severance, and Lorenz, Marian S., <cite>Course of
-Study</cite>, Long Beach Public Schools, Long Beach, California,
-1923.</p>
-
-<p>Lister, C. C., <cite>Muscular Movement Writing, Advanced
-Book</cite>. The Macmillan Company, New York, 1919.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; <cite>What I Saw in a Writing Class</cite>. A. N. Palmer
-Publishing Co., New York, 1912.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; <cite>Writing Lessons in the Primary Grades and
-Teachers’ Guide to Writing Lessons in Primary
-Grades</cite>. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York,
-1912.</p>
-
-<p>Meleney, Dr. Clarence E., Associate City Superintendent,
-New York City, <cite>Observation on the Teaching of Penmanship
-in the Elementary Schools</cite>. A. N. Palmer
-Publishing Co., New York, 1911.</p>
-
-<p>Mills, Edward Clarence, <cite>Business Penmanship</cite>. American
-Book Co., New York, 1916.</p>
-
-<p>Palmer, Austin Norman, <cite>Palmer Method</cite>. A. N. Palmer
-Publishing Co., New York, 1921.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; <cite>Penmanship Pointers</cite>, a bi-monthly magazine.
-A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; <cite>Palmer Penmanship Budget.</cite> A. N. Palmer Publishing
-Co., New York, 1915.</p>
-
-<p>Shouse, J. B., “Obstacles to Good Handwriting,” <cite>Elementary
-School Journal</cite>, December, 1923.</p>
-
-<p>Smith, Albert J., <cite>Applied Graphology</cite>. The Gregg Publishing
-Co., New York, 1920.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[125]</span></p>
-
-<p>Snesrud, J. M., <cite>Handwriting Efficiency in Junior and Senior
-High Schools</cite>. The Gregg Publishing Co., New
-York, 1921.</p>
-
-<p><cite>Spencerian Authors.</cite> Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor &amp; Co.,
-New York, 1874.</p>
-
-<p>Starch, Dr. Daniel, <cite>Educational Measurements</cite>. The Macmillan
-Company, New York, 1916.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; <cite>Educational Psychology</cite>. The Macmillan Company,
-New York, 1919.</p>
-
-<p>Stryker, J. A., “Normal School Penmanship.” Paper read
-before the National Association of Penmanship Supervisors,
-Chicago, 1914.</p>
-
-<p><cite>The 18th Year Book of the National Society for the Study
-of Education</cite>, Part II. Public School Publishing Co.,
-Bloomington, Ill., 1919.</p>
-
-<p>Thompson, Mary Elizabeth, <cite>Psychology and Pedagogy of
-Writing</cite>. Warwick &amp; York, Baltimore, 1911.</p>
-
-<p>Thompson, O. S., <cite>Thompson’s New Penmanship, Teachers’
-Manual</cite>. Privately printed, Monrovia, California,
-1915.</p>
-
-<p>Taylor, Dr. Joseph S., District Superintendent, New
-York City, <cite>Educational Value of Muscular Movement
-Writing</cite>. A. N. Palmer Publishing Co., New York,
-1910.</p>
-
-<p>Zaner, C. P., <cite>Zaner Method Manual 144</cite>. Zaner &amp; Bloser
-Publishing Co., Columbus, Ohio, 1915.</p>
-
-<p>&mdash;&mdash; <cite>Blackboard Writing.</cite> Zaner &amp; Bloser Publishing
-Co., Columbus, Ohio, 1911.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter boxitindex">
-<p class="pminus1"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[126]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak pminus1" id="INDEX">INDEX</h2>
-
-
-<ul class="index">
-<li class="ifrst">Accuracy, Penmanship an aid to, <a href="#Page_32">32</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Alphabet, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Association, Laws of, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Athletics, Penmanship as correlated with, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Dr. Gulick’s rules, <a href="#Page_32">32</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">relation to penmanship, <a href="#Page_33">33</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Awards, <a href="#Page_83">83</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Blackboard, Kind and use of, <a href="#Page_63">63</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">as a teacher, <a href="#Page_64">64</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">gives courage to poor writers, <a href="#Page_65">65</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">points to be observed in lessons on, <a href="#Page_65">65</a>, <a href="#Page_67">67</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Blackboard procedure for all grades, <a href="#Page_73">73</a>, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Blotter, Use of, <a href="#Page_70">70</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Boice, quoted, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Chamberlain, Quotation, <a href="#Page_32">32</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Clews, Henry, Statement of, <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Coffman, Lotus D., quoted, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Colonel Parker, Quotation, <a href="#Page_57">57</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Commercial schools, Success of, <a href="#Page_45">45</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Commercialization of penmanship, <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Comprehensive Physical Culture, Rules for good bearing quoted from, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Conventions, Obedience to, encouraged, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Cook, quoted, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Cooperation of all officials and departments necessary, <a href="#Page_58">58</a>, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Correlation of penmanship with other subjects, <a href="#Page_57">57</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Counting, <a href="#Page_83">83</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Count, correct, Movement regulated by, <a href="#Page_24">24</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Cranor, Katherine Taylor, quoted, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Credit evaluation, <a href="#Page_50">50</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Dictation, <a href="#Page_83">83</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Elliott, quoted, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Eyesight, Conservation of, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Figures, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Folders, <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Good writing, worth while, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Good writing a time saver, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Good writing, Confidence established through, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, First, <a href="#Page_86">86</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">nature and difficulty of problem, <a href="#Page_87">87</a>, <a href="#Page_88">88</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_88">88</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">material, <a href="#Page_89">89</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_89">89</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">demonstration, <a href="#Page_89">89</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">distribution of time, <a href="#Page_90">90</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">names, <a href="#Page_90">90</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Z group, <a href="#Page_90">90</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Second, <a href="#Page_91">91</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">conditions necessary for laying correct foundation, <a href="#Page_91">91</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">results based upon use of correct habit, <a href="#Page_92">92</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">board work, <a href="#Page_92">92</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">posture, <a href="#Page_92">92</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_93">93</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">material, <a href="#Page_93">93</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_94">94</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">demonstration 94;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Z group, <a href="#Page_94">94</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">distribution of time to subject matter, <a href="#Page_94">94</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">headings, <a href="#Page_94">94</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Third, <a href="#Page_95">95</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">ability of, <a href="#Page_95">95</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Dr. Ayres, quoted, on legibility, <a href="#Page_95">95</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">reviews, <a href="#Page_96">96</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[127]</span>aim, <a href="#Page_96">96</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">material, <a href="#Page_97">97</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_97">97</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">distribution of time, <a href="#Page_97">97</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">heading, <a href="#Page_97">97</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">sample, <a href="#Page_97">97</a>, <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Fourth, <a href="#Page_98">98</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">demand met by, <a href="#Page_98">98</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_98">98</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">materials, <a href="#Page_99">99</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_97">97</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">distribution of time, <a href="#Page_99">99</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">heading, <a href="#Page_99">99</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">sample, <a href="#Page_100">100</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Fifth, <a href="#Page_100">100</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">independent work may be expected of, <a href="#Page_100">100</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_101">101</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">material, <a href="#Page_101">101</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_101">101</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">distribution of time to subject matter, <a href="#Page_102">102</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">heading, <a href="#Page_102">102</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">sample, <a href="#Page_102">102</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Sixth, <a href="#Page_103">103</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">demand pressing in, <a href="#Page_103">103</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">object clear to pupils, <a href="#Page_103">103</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_103">103</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Seventh, <a href="#Page_104">104</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">quality equal to that of adults, <a href="#Page_104">104</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">interest continued, <a href="#Page_104">104</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">home practice of, <a href="#Page_104">104</a>, <a href="#Page_105">105</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">musical accompaniment, <a href="#Page_105">105</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">captains in, <a href="#Page_105">105</a>, <a href="#Page_106">106</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">results, <a href="#Page_106">106</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_106">106</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_106">106</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Grade, Eighth, <a href="#Page_107">107</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Practice maintained in, <a href="#Page_107">107</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">practical aid of pupils in, <a href="#Page_107">107</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">individuality develops in, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">habits important in, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">length of lesson, <a href="#Page_108">108</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Group Plan most effective, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Group Plan, Value of, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">the working of, <a href="#Page_26">26</a>, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Habits, Correct maxims for, <a href="#Page_39">39</a>, <a href="#Page_40">40</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">new habit may discommode, <a href="#Page_40">40</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Habits, Correct, established by repetition, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Habits, good, Objectives in, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">High School, Junior, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Condition in, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">ideals of, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">tool subjects in, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">material, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">required subjects, <a href="#Page_109">109</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">tests, <a href="#Page_110">110</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">application, <a href="#Page_110">110</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">High School, Senior, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">many unskilled in, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">lack of preparation, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aim, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">materials, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">required subject, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">tests, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Initial drafts, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Ink, Kind, care of, <a href="#Page_71">71</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">James, on relaxation, quoted, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">James, Quotation on interest, <a href="#Page_33">33</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Line Quality, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">McMurray, How to Study, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">McMurray, quoted, <a href="#Page_62">62</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Manual arts, Penmanship as one, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Mastery, Pleasure and profit in, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Material, Economy of, <a href="#Page_71">71</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">good, necessary, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Maxwell, Henry, Study of efficiency by, <a href="#Page_50">50</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Muscular movement a reformer, <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Muscular movement, application to general writing, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Muscular movement conserves time and energy, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>, <a href="#Page_46">46</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">conserves vision, <a href="#Page_47">47</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">conserves health generally, <a href="#Page_48">48</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Muscular movement defined, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Muscular movement, universal method, <a href="#Page_44">44</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Muscular movement, Utility of, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Name-Cards, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Paper, Economy of, <a href="#Page_67">67</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">quality and ruling, <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[128]</span>Paper, How to move and slant, <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Parents, Influence of, <a href="#Page_60">60</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Pencils, Kind, <a href="#Page_68">68</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">Use of, by primary pupils only, <a href="#Page_69">69</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Penholder, kind, <a href="#Page_70">70</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Penholders, position of, <a href="#Page_21">21</a>, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Pens, Kind, care of, <a href="#Page_69">69</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Plan, A general, <a href="#Page_85">85</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Poor writing a handicap, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Position, Correct, of hand, <a href="#Page_20">20-21</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Posture, correct, Value of, <a href="#Page_19">19</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">methods of obtaining, <a href="#Page_19">19-20</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Posture, correct, Frequency of drill on, <a href="#Page_20">20</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Practice, Results of thoughtless, <a href="#Page_33">33</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">frequency means economy, <a href="#Page_34">34</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">concrete suggestions for preliminary, <a href="#Page_34">34</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">content and length of period, <a href="#Page_35">35</a>, <a href="#Page_36">36</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">effective leads to correct writing habit, <a href="#Page_37">37</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Progress lesson, <a href="#Page_77">77</a>, <a href="#Page_78">78</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Rating, Value of, <a href="#Page_120">120</a>, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Relaxation a necessary condition, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Relaxation of adults, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Relaxation, Six methods of obtaining, <a href="#Page_17">17-18</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Review, Value of, <a href="#Page_30">30</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Samples, Object of, <a href="#Page_80">80</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">procedure and standards, <a href="#Page_81">81</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Score card, Value of, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Segregation, Value of, <a href="#Page_78">78</a>, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Similarity of letter forms, recognition of, <a href="#Page_30">30</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Slant, Correct, the result of correct direction of movement, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Standards, Two sets of, <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Study, How to, <a href="#Page_72">72</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">capitals, <a href="#Page_72">72</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">words and sentences, <a href="#Page_72">72</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Supervisor, defined, The best, <a href="#Page_122">122</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Supervisor, Function of, <a href="#Page_114">114</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Supervisor, Leadership a prime qualification, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">preparation and desirable personality necessary, <a href="#Page_115">115</a>, <a href="#Page_116">116</a>, <a href="#Page_117">117</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">physical endurance and appearance, <a href="#Page_116">116</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">experience an aid to, <a href="#Page_118">118</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">continual preparation necessary for, <a href="#Page_118">118</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">aid in improving class room instruction, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">course of study and the, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">value of tests recognized by, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">ability to demonstrate necessary for, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">attention to routine matters, <a href="#Page_120">120</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">service, <a href="#Page_120">120</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Supervisor’s visit, Preparation of teacher for, <a href="#Page_81">81</a>, <a href="#Page_82">82</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Teacher, Duty of, <a href="#Page_52">52</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">qualifications of, <a href="#Page_53">53</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">as psychologists, <a href="#Page_54">54</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">as demonstrators, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">best proof of a good, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">personal influence of, <a href="#Page_56">56</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">as an inspiration, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Technique necessary, <a href="#Page_51">51</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Test, A satisfactory, <a href="#Page_61">61</a>, <a href="#Page_62">62</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Tests, Application of standard, <a href="#Page_76">76</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">endurance, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Tests, standard, Use of, <a href="#Page_84">84</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Theorist, defined, A, <a href="#Page_52">52</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Time, Economy of, <a href="#Page_48">48</a>, <a href="#Page_49">49</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">a computation on, <a href="#Page_50">50</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Timepiece, Use of, <a href="#Page_83">83</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Typewriter, Use of, <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Visualization, Correct, <a href="#Page_28">28</a>;</li>
-<li class="isub1">principle of multiple impression, <a href="#Page_29">29</a></li>
-
-<li class="indx">Visualization, Rules for effective, <a href="#Page_31">31</a></li>
-
-
-<li class="ifrst">Z Group, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li>
-</ul>
-</div>
-
-<hr class="tb x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<div class="transnote">
-<h2 style="margin-top: 0em">Transcriber’s Notes:</h2>
-
-<p>Illustrations have been moved to paragraph breaks near where they are
-mentioned.</p>
-
-<p>Punctuation has been made consistent.</p>
-
-<p>Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in
-the original publication, except that obvious typographical errors
-have been corrected.</p>
-</div></div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PENMANSHIP ***</div>
-<div style='text-align:left'>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Updated editions will replace the previous one&#8212;the old editions will
-be renamed.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG&#8482;
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br />
-<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br />
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span>
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-To protect the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221;), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
-or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.B. &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (&#8220;the
-Foundation&#8221; or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg&#8482; work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work (any work
-on which the phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; appears, or with which the
-phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-</div>
-
-<blockquote>
- <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
- other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
- whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
- of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
- at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
- are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
- of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
- </div>
-</blockquote>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221; associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg&#8482; License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg&#8482;.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; License.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work in a format
-other than &#8220;Plain Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg&#8482; website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original &#8220;Plain
-Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg&#8482; works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-provided that:
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'>
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, &#8220;Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation.&#8221;
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- works.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works.
- </div>
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain &#8220;Defects,&#8221; such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the &#8220;Right
-of Replacement or Refund&#8221; described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you &#8216;AS-IS&#8217;, WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg&#8482;&#8217;s
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg&#8482; collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg&#8482; and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation&#8217;s EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state&#8217;s laws.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation&#8217;s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation&#8217;s website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
-public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
-visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg&#8482;,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-</div>
-
-</div>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/cover.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index dfc64bb..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/cover.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i017.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i017.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index d28d4c6..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i017.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i019.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i019.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index b319947..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i019.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i021.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i021.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index a879992..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i021.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i027.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i027.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 9de61e5..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i027.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i031.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i031.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 1482660..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i031.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i045.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i045.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 0220bf3..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i045.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/i077.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/i077.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 39d7595..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/i077.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/66667-h/images/titlepage.jpg b/old/66667-h/images/titlepage.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c698ac..0000000
--- a/old/66667-h/images/titlepage.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ